<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Tchen</id>
		<title>Protocase Designer Documentation - User contributions [en]</title>
		<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Tchen"/>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Special:Contributions/Tchen"/>
		<updated>2026-04-30T15:39:16Z</updated>
		<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
		<generator>MediaWiki 1.27.1</generator>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_an_enclosure_to_mount_a_PCB&amp;diff=246</id>
		<title>Creating an enclosure to mount a PCB</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_an_enclosure_to_mount_a_PCB&amp;diff=246"/>
				<updated>2012-10-22T11:06:37Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;One of the most common uses for Protocase Designer is to design a custom enclosure to mount a PCB and associated components.&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial will guide you through the process of creating a custom rackmount enclosure to mount a mini-ITX PCB using self-clinching fasteners, and create cutouts for the PCB, power supply, and fan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Select components to mount in enclosure==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Source the components you want to mount in your enclosure&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:photo-mini-ITXPCB.png|250px|center|thumb|Mini-ITX PCB]][[File:photo-fan-60mm.png|100px|center|thumb|60mm Fan]][[File:photo-powersupply.png|200px|center|thumb|Power Supply]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Determine mounting specifications for components==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Determine the mounting hole and cutout dimensions and locations for all the components.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-powersupply-pcb.jpg|600px|thumb|center|Top viewâ€”Sketch of power supply and PCB mounting dimensions]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-powersupply-pcb-rear.jpg|600px|thumb|center|Rear viewâ€”Sketch of power supply and PCB mounting dimensions]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}{{Note|Mounting dimensions are not needed for the 60mm fan since a built-in cutout for the fan will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
}}{{Note|It is important to properly understand how to mount each component including any required clearances.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Determine mounting locations for components==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Determine mounting location for all components&lt;br /&gt;
#Determine cutout, mounting hole, and self-clinching fastener sizes to mount all components&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a sketch of all required mounting dimensions.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-mounting-dimensions.jpg|600px|thumb|center|Top viewâ€”Sketch of power supply and PCB mounting dimensions]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-mounting-dimensions-rear.jpg|600px|thumb|center|Rear viewâ€”Sketch of power supply and PCB mounting dimensions]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}{{Note|Dimensions are always measured from the absolute origin on the OUTSIDE of the enclosure (i.e. you must factor in the thickness of the enclosure)}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Create enclosure from template==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following&lt;br /&gt;
#*Open Protocase DesignerÂ® and click '''New File'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#*If Protocase DesignerÂ® is already open, on the '''File''' menu, click '''New'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Rackmount Enclosures''', then click '''Rackmount'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-newassembly-rackmount-color.png|500px|thumb|centre|New Assembly window]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a '''Depth''' of 15 (inches) and '''Height''' of 2 (U).&lt;br /&gt;
#Select a color for each panel, as desired and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select 14 (.075) for all thicknesses.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''View''' menu, click '''Show/Hide Parts'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-showhideparts-rackmount.png|300px|thumb|centre|Show/Hide Parts dialog box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to clear the '''Cover''' check box. This will hide the cover allowing you to view the inside of the enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-main-rackmount-nocover.png|400px|thumb|centre|Main windowâ€”rackmount enclosure with cover hidden]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add PCB and power supply cutouts to rear panel==&lt;br /&gt;
This enclosure requires two rectangular cutouts on the rear panel to accommodate the mini-ITX PCB and power supply.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click the rear face. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor windowâ€”rackmount rear face]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Rectangle''' tool. [[File:tool-rectangle.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Draw two rectangles at approximate mounting locations.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear-rectangles.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”rectangle cutouts on rackmount rear face]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Circle''' tool. [[File:tool-circle.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Draw two circles on each side of the right rectangle.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear-circles.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”circle cutouts on rackmount rear face]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select each cutout and update the origin, width, and height as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
#*PCB rectangle cutout (on left)&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 10&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 0.375&lt;br /&gt;
#:Width: 6.25&lt;br /&gt;
#:Height: 1.75&lt;br /&gt;
#*Power Supply rectangle cutout (on right)&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 1.5&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 0.4&lt;br /&gt;
#:Width: 3.2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Height: 1.6&lt;br /&gt;
#*Power Supply circle cutout 1&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 4.85&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 1.2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Diameter: 0.125&lt;br /&gt;
#*Power Supply circle cutout 2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 1.35&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 1.2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Diameter: 0.125&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear-circle-origin.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”updating circle origin]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add built-in fan cutout to rear panel==&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase DesignerÂ® offers a library of cutouts for common components including fans of various sizes.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, point to '''Fans''', '''General''', then click '''60mm'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the fan cutout at the approximate mounting location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear-fan-placing.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor windowâ€”placing fan cutout]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the fan cutout and update the origin as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
#*Fan cutout&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 7.5&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 1.5&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear-fan-origin.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor windowâ€”rack mount with rectangle cutouts and fan cutout]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Accept &amp;amp; Close'''. [[File:button-acceptclose.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add self-clinching fasteners to chassis==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click the chassis (bottom) of the enclosure. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Inside''' [[File:button-inside.png|60px|middle]] to change the view to the inside of the chassis.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-pem-studs-440-500.png|300px|thumb|center|Self Clinching Fastener dialog boxâ€”selecting studs, 4-40 x .500&amp;quot; long]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select Studs, 4-40 x .500 long and click '''Place PEM'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place two studs at the approximate mounting location for the power supply.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-chassis-studs.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”placing studs, 4-40 x .500&amp;quot; long]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-pem-standoffs-440-375.png|300px|thumb|center|Self Clinching Fastener dialog boxâ€”selecting standoffs, 4-40 x .375&amp;quot; long]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select Standoffs, 4-40 x .375&amp;quot; long and click '''Place PEM'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place four standoffs at the approximate mounting location for the PCB (on the right).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-chassis-standoffs.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor windowâ€”placing standoffs, 4-40 x .375&amp;quot; long]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool.  [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select each standoff and stud and update their origins as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
#*Stud 1&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 1.15&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 6.675&lt;br /&gt;
#*Stud 2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 4.65&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 6.675&lt;br /&gt;
#*Standoff 1&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 9.4&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 14&lt;br /&gt;
#*Standoff 2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 15.65&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 14&lt;br /&gt;
#*Standoff 3&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 9.4&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 8&lt;br /&gt;
#*Standoff 4&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 15.65&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 8&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-chassis-pems-origin.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”studs and standoffs placed in proper locations]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing toolbar''', click '''Accept &amp;amp; Close'''. [[File:button-acceptclose.png|40px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-main-rackmount-pems.png|600px|thumb|center|Main windowâ€”rack mount with studs and standoffs added]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
You can now customize your enclosure further by adding additional cutouts, silkscreen, and hardware to the other faces and then request an instant quote.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_an_enclosure_to_mount_a_PCB&amp;diff=245</id>
		<title>Creating an enclosure to mount a PCB</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_an_enclosure_to_mount_a_PCB&amp;diff=245"/>
				<updated>2012-10-22T10:47:40Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: /* Sketch mounting locations for components */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;One of the most common uses for Protocase Designer is to design a custom enclosure to mount a PCB and associated components.&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial will guide you through the process of creating a custom rackmount enclosure to mount a mini-ITX PCB using self-clinching fasteners, and create cutouts for the PCB, power supply, and fan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Select components to mount in enclosure==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Source the components you want to mount in your enclosure&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:photo-mini-ITXPCB.png|250px|center|thumb|Mini-ITX PCB]][[File:photo-fan-60mm.png|100px|center|thumb|60mm Fan]][[File:photo-powersupply.png|200px|center|thumb|Power Supply]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Determine the mounting specifications (i.e. mounting hole and cutout dimensions and locations).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-powersupply-pcb.jpg|600px|thumb|center|Top viewâ€”Sketch of power supply and PCB mounting dimensions]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-powersupply-pcb-rear.jpg|600px|thumb|center|Rear viewâ€”Sketch of power supply and PCB mounting dimensions]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}{{Note|Mounting dimensions are not needed for the 60mm fan since a built-in cutout for the fan will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
}}{{Note|It is important to properly understand how to mount each component including any required clearances.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Determine mounting locations for components==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Determine mounting location for all components&lt;br /&gt;
#Determine cutout, mounting hole, and self-clinching fastener sizes to mount all components&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a sketch of all required mounting dimensions.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-mounting-dimensions.jpg|600px|thumb|center|Top viewâ€”Sketch of power supply and PCB mounting dimensions]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-mounting-dimensions-rear.jpg|600px|thumb|center|Rear viewâ€”Sketch of power supply and PCB mounting dimensions]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}{{Note|Dimensions are always measured from the absolute origin on the OUTSIDE of the enclosure (i.e. you must factor in the thickness of the enclosure)}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Create enclosure from template==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following&lt;br /&gt;
#*Open Protocase DesignerÂ® and click '''New File'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#*If Protocase DesignerÂ® is already open, on the '''File''' menu, click '''New'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Rackmount Enclosures''', then click '''Rackmount'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-newassembly-rackmount-color.png|500px|thumb|centre|New Assembly window]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a '''Depth''' of 15 (inches) and '''Height''' of 2 (U).&lt;br /&gt;
#Select a color for each panel, as desired and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select 14 (.075) for all thicknesses.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''View''' menu, click '''Show/Hide Parts'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-showhideparts-rackmount.png|300px|thumb|centre|Show/Hide Parts dialog box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to clear the '''Cover''' check box. This will hide the cover allowing you to view the inside of the enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-main-rackmount-nocover.png|400px|thumb|centre|Main windowâ€”rackmount enclosure with cover hidden]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add PCB and power supply cutouts to rear panel==&lt;br /&gt;
This enclosure requires two rectangular cutouts on the rear panel to accommodate the mini-ITX PCB and power supply.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click the rear face. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor windowâ€”rackmount rear face]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Rectangle''' tool. [[File:tool-rectangle.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Draw two rectangles at approximate mounting locations.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear-rectangles.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”rectangle cutouts on rackmount rear face]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Circle''' tool. [[File:tool-circle.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Draw two circles on each side of the right rectangle.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear-circles.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”circle cutouts on rackmount rear face]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select each cutout and update the origin, width, and height as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
#*PCB rectangle cutout (on left)&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 10&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 0.375&lt;br /&gt;
#:Width: 6.25&lt;br /&gt;
#:Height: 1.75&lt;br /&gt;
#*Power Supply rectangle cutout (on right)&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 1.5&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 0.4&lt;br /&gt;
#:Width: 3.2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Height: 1.6&lt;br /&gt;
#*Power Supply circle cutout 1&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 4.85&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 1.2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Diameter: 0.125&lt;br /&gt;
#*Power Supply circle cutout 2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 1.35&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 1.2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Diameter: 0.125&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear-circle-origin.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”updating circle origin]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add built-in fan cutout to rear panel==&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase DesignerÂ® offers a library of cutouts for common components including fans of various sizes.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, point to '''Fans''', '''General''', then click '''60mm'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the fan cutout at the approximate mounting location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear-fan-placing.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor windowâ€”placing fan cutout]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the fan cutout and update the origin as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
#*Fan cutout&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 7.5&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 1.5&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear-fan-origin.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor windowâ€”rack mount with rectangle cutouts and fan cutout]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Accept &amp;amp; Close'''. [[File:button-acceptclose.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add self-clinching fasteners to chassis==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click the chassis (bottom) of the enclosure. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Inside''' [[File:button-inside.png|60px|middle]] to change the view to the inside of the chassis.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-pem-studs-440-500.png|300px|thumb|center|Self Clinching Fastener dialog boxâ€”selecting studs, 4-40 x .500&amp;quot; long]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select Studs, 4-40 x .500 long and click '''Place PEM'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place two studs at the approximate mounting location for the power supply.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-chassis-studs.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”placing studs, 4-40 x .500&amp;quot; long]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-pem-standoffs-440-375.png|300px|thumb|center|Self Clinching Fastener dialog boxâ€”selecting standoffs, 4-40 x .375&amp;quot; long]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select Standoffs, 4-40 x .375&amp;quot; long and click '''Place PEM'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place four standoffs at the approximate mounting location for the PCB (on the right).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-chassis-standoffs.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor windowâ€”placing standoffs, 4-40 x .375&amp;quot; long]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool.  [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select each standoff and stud and update their origins as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
#*Stud 1&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 1.15&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 6.675&lt;br /&gt;
#*Stud 2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 4.65&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 6.675&lt;br /&gt;
#*Standoff 1&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 9.4&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 14&lt;br /&gt;
#*Standoff 2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 15.65&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 14&lt;br /&gt;
#*Standoff 3&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 9.4&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 8&lt;br /&gt;
#*Standoff 4&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 15.65&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 8&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-chassis-pems-origin.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”studs and standoffs placed in proper locations]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing toolbar''', click '''Accept &amp;amp; Close'''. [[File:button-acceptclose.png|40px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-main-rackmount-pems.png|600px|thumb|center|Main windowâ€”rack mount with studs and standoffs added]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
You can now customize your enclosure further by adding additional cutouts, silkscreen, and hardware to the other faces and then request an instant quote.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_an_enclosure_to_mount_a_PCB&amp;diff=244</id>
		<title>Creating an enclosure to mount a PCB</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_an_enclosure_to_mount_a_PCB&amp;diff=244"/>
				<updated>2012-09-20T14:26:11Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: /* Add cutouts to chassis */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;One of the most common uses for Protocase Designer is to design a custom enclosure to mount a PCB and associated components.&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial will guide you through the process of creating a custom rackmount enclosure to mount a mini-ITX PCB using self-clinching fasteners, and create cutouts for the PCB, power supply, and fan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Select components to mount in enclosure==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Source the components you want to mount in your enclosure&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:photo-mini-ITXPCB.png|250px|center|thumb|Mini-ITX PCB]][[File:photo-fan-60mm.png|100px|center|thumb|60mm Fan]][[File:photo-powersupply.png|200px|center|thumb|Power Supply]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Determine the mounting specifications (i.e. mounting hole and cutout dimensions and locations).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-powersupply-pcb.jpg|600px|thumb|center|Top viewâ€”Sketch of power supply and PCB mounting dimensions]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-powersupply-pcb-rear.jpg|600px|thumb|center|Rear viewâ€”Sketch of power supply and PCB mounting dimensions]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}{{Note|Mounting dimensions are not needed for the 60mm fan since a built-in cutout for the fan will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
}}{{Note|It is important to properly understand how to mount each component including any required clearances.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Sketch mounting locations for components==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Determine mounting location for all components&lt;br /&gt;
#Determine cutout, mounting hole, and self-clinching fastener sizes to mount all components&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a sketch of all required mounting dimensions.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-mounting-dimensions.jpg|600px|thumb|center|Top viewâ€”Sketch of power supply and PCB mounting dimensions]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-mounting-dimensions-rear.jpg|600px|thumb|center|Rear viewâ€”Sketch of power supply and PCB mounting dimensions]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}{{Note|Dimensions are always measured from the absolute origin on the OUTSIDE of the enclosure (i.e. you must factor in the thickness of the enclosure)}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Create enclosure from template==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following&lt;br /&gt;
#*Open Protocase DesignerÂ® and click '''New File'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#*If Protocase DesignerÂ® is already open, on the '''File''' menu, click '''New'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Rackmount Enclosures''', then click '''Rackmount'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-newassembly-rackmount-color.png|500px|thumb|centre|New Assembly window]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a '''Depth''' of 15 (inches) and '''Height''' of 2 (U).&lt;br /&gt;
#Select a color for each panel, as desired and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select 14 (.075) for all thicknesses.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''View''' menu, click '''Show/Hide Parts'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-showhideparts-rackmount.png|300px|thumb|centre|Show/Hide Parts dialog box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to clear the '''Cover''' check box. This will hide the cover allowing you to view the inside of the enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-main-rackmount-nocover.png|400px|thumb|centre|Main windowâ€”rackmount enclosure with cover hidden]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add PCB and power supply cutouts to rear panel==&lt;br /&gt;
This enclosure requires two rectangular cutouts on the rear panel to accommodate the mini-ITX PCB and power supply.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click the rear face. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor windowâ€”rackmount rear face]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Rectangle''' tool. [[File:tool-rectangle.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Draw two rectangles at approximate mounting locations.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear-rectangles.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”rectangle cutouts on rackmount rear face]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Circle''' tool. [[File:tool-circle.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Draw two circles on each side of the right rectangle.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear-circles.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”circle cutouts on rackmount rear face]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select each cutout and update the origin, width, and height as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
#*PCB rectangle cutout (on left)&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 10&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 0.375&lt;br /&gt;
#:Width: 6.25&lt;br /&gt;
#:Height: 1.75&lt;br /&gt;
#*Power Supply rectangle cutout (on right)&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 1.5&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 0.4&lt;br /&gt;
#:Width: 3.2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Height: 1.6&lt;br /&gt;
#*Power Supply circle cutout 1&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 4.85&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 1.2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Diameter: 0.125&lt;br /&gt;
#*Power Supply circle cutout 2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 1.35&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 1.2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Diameter: 0.125&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear-circle-origin.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”updating circle origin]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add built-in fan cutout to rear panel==&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase DesignerÂ® offers a library of cutouts for common components including fans of various sizes.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, point to '''Fans''', '''General''', then click '''60mm'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the fan cutout at the approximate mounting location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear-fan-placing.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor windowâ€”placing fan cutout]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the fan cutout and update the origin as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
#*Fan cutout&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 7.5&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 1.5&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear-fan-origin.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor windowâ€”rack mount with rectangle cutouts and fan cutout]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Accept &amp;amp; Close'''. [[File:button-acceptclose.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add self-clinching fasteners to chassis==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click the chassis (bottom) of the enclosure. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Inside''' [[File:button-inside.png|60px|middle]] to change the view to the inside of the chassis.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-pem-studs-440-500.png|300px|thumb|center|Self Clinching Fastener dialog boxâ€”selecting studs, 4-40 x .500&amp;quot; long]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select Studs, 4-40 x .500 long and click '''Place PEM'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place two studs at the approximate mounting location for the power supply.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-chassis-studs.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”placing studs, 4-40 x .500&amp;quot; long]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-pem-standoffs-440-375.png|300px|thumb|center|Self Clinching Fastener dialog boxâ€”selecting standoffs, 4-40 x .375&amp;quot; long]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select Standoffs, 4-40 x .375&amp;quot; long and click '''Place PEM'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place four standoffs at the approximate mounting location for the PCB (on the right).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-chassis-standoffs.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor windowâ€”placing standoffs, 4-40 x .375&amp;quot; long]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool.  [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select each standoff and stud and update their origins as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
#*Stud 1&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 1.15&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 6.675&lt;br /&gt;
#*Stud 2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 4.65&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 6.675&lt;br /&gt;
#*Standoff 1&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 9.4&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 14&lt;br /&gt;
#*Standoff 2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 15.65&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 14&lt;br /&gt;
#*Standoff 3&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 9.4&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 8&lt;br /&gt;
#*Standoff 4&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 15.65&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 8&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-chassis-pems-origin.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”studs and standoffs placed in proper locations]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing toolbar''', click '''Accept &amp;amp; Close'''. [[File:button-acceptclose.png|40px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-main-rackmount-pems.png|600px|thumb|center|Main windowâ€”rack mount with studs and standoffs added]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
You can now customize your enclosure further by adding additional cutouts, silkscreen, and hardware to the other faces and then request an instant quote.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces&amp;diff=243</id>
		<title>Aligning cutouts on opposite faces</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces&amp;diff=243"/>
				<updated>2012-09-19T18:21:55Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This tutorial will show you how to create 4 in x 2 in rectangular cutouts on the front and rear faces so that they are aligned with each other. Refer to [[Face_Editor#Coordinate_System|Coordinate System]] for an explanation of the coordinate system used in Protocase Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click the front face. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Face Editor''' window, create a rectangle cutout approximately as shown below in the bottom left corner.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-rectangle.png|500px|thumb|center|Face Editor windowâ€”rectangle cutout on u-shape front face]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, set the Origin(X) to 3 and Origin(Y) to 2. The rectangle will be positioned with respect to the origin in the bottom left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
#Set the Width to 4 and Height to 2.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Accept &amp;amp; Close'''. [[File:button-acceptclose.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Main''' window, rotate the model to show the rear face.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click the rear face. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Face Editor''' window, create a rectangle cutout approximately as shown below in the bottom right corner.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-rear-rectangle.png|500px|thumb|center|Face Editor windowâ€”rectangle cutout on u-shape rear face]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, set the Origin(X) to 3 and Origin(Y) to 2 (same as for the front face). The rectangle will be positioned with respect to the origin in the bottom right corner.&lt;br /&gt;
#Set the Width to 4 and Height to 2 (same as for the front face).&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Accept &amp;amp; Close'''. [[File:button-acceptclose.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Rotate the model to view both rectangle cutouts. Notice how they are aligned with each other.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-main-ushape-alignedrectangles.png|500px|thumb|center|Main windowâ€”rectangle cutouts aligned on front and rear faces]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|You can apply the same technique to align cutouts on any two faces of your enclosure.}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces&amp;diff=242</id>
		<title>Aligning cutouts on opposite faces</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces&amp;diff=242"/>
				<updated>2012-09-19T18:21:27Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This tutorial will show you how to create 4 in x 2 in rectangular cutouts on the front and rear faces so that they are aligned with each other. Refer to [[Face_Editor#Coordinate_System|Coordinate System]] for an explanation of the coordinate system used in Protocase Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click the front face. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Face Editor''' window, create a rectangle cutout approximately as shown below in the bottom left corner.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-rectangle.png|500px|thumb|center|Face Editor windowâ€”rectangle cutout on u-shape front face]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, set the Origin(X) to 3 and Origin(Y) to 2. The rectangle will be positioned with respect to the origin in the bottom left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
#Set the Width to 4 and Height to 2.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Accept &amp;amp; Close'''. [[File:button-acceptclose.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Main''' window, rotate the model to show the rear face.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click the rear face. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Face Editor''' window, create a rectangle cutout approximately as shown below in the bottom right corner.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-rear-rectangle.png|500px|thumb|center|Face Editor windowâ€”rectangle cutout on u-shape rear face]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, set the Origin(X) to 3 and Origin(Y) to 2 (same as for the front face). The rectangle will be positioned with respect to the origin in the bottom right corner.&lt;br /&gt;
#Set the Width to 4 and Height to 2 (same as for the front face).&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Accept &amp;amp; Close'''. [[File:button-acceptclose.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Rotate the model to view both rectangle cutouts. Notice how they are aligned with each other.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-main-ushape-alignedrectangles.png|500px|thumb|center|Main windowâ€”rectangle cutouts aligned on front and rear faces]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|You can apply the same technique to align cutouts on any two faces of your enclosure.}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-front-rectangle.png&amp;diff=241</id>
		<title>File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-front-rectangle.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-front-rectangle.png&amp;diff=241"/>
				<updated>2012-09-19T18:20:45Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces&amp;diff=240</id>
		<title>Aligning cutouts on opposite faces</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces&amp;diff=240"/>
				<updated>2012-09-19T18:16:48Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: Created page with &amp;quot;This tutorial will show you how to create 1 in x 2 in rectangular cutouts on the front and rear faces so that they are aligned with each other. Refer to [[Face_Editor#Coordina...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This tutorial will show you how to create 1 in x 2 in rectangular cutouts on the front and rear faces so that they are aligned with each other. Refer to [[Face_Editor#Coordinate_System|Coordinate System]] for an explanation of the coordinate system used in Protocase Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click the front face. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Face Editor''' window, create a rectangle cutout approximately as shown below in the bottom left corner.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-rectangle.png|500px|thumb|center|Face Editor windowâ€”rectangle cutout on u-shape front face]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, set the Origin(X) to 3 and Origin(Y) to 2. The rectangle will be positioned with respect to the origin in the bottom left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
#Set the Width to 4 and Height to 2.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Accept &amp;amp; Close'''. [[File:button-acceptclose.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Main''' window, rotate the model to show the rear face.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click the rear face. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Face Editor''' window, create a rectangle cutout approximately as shown below in the bottom right corner.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-rear-rectangle.png|500px|thumb|center|Face Editor windowâ€”rectangle cutout on u-shape rear face]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, set the Origin(X) to 3 and Origin(Y) to 2 (same as for the front face). The rectangle will be positioned with respect to the origin in the bottom right corner.&lt;br /&gt;
#Set the Width to 4 and Height to 2 (same as for the front face).&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Accept &amp;amp; Close'''. [[File:button-acceptclose.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Rotate the model to view both rectangle cutouts. Notice how they are aligned with each other.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-main-ushape-alignedrectangles.png|500px|thumb|center|Main windowâ€”rectangle cutouts aligned on front and rear faces]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|You can apply the same technique to align cutouts on any two faces of your enclosure.}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Tutorials&amp;diff=239</id>
		<title>Tutorials</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Tutorials&amp;diff=239"/>
				<updated>2012-09-19T18:08:24Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;====[[Creating an enclosure to mount a PCB]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial guides you through the process of creating a custom rackmount enclosure to mount a mini-ITX PCB using self-clinching fasteners, and create cutouts for the PCB, power supply, and fan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial explains how to select the height of self-clinching fasteners, such as standoffs and studs, for mounting components to your enclosures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Determining distance between objects]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial shows techniques for using the Measure tool to accurately place and move objects on a face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Creating a custom cutout for a connector]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial guides you through creating a cutout to fit a custom connector and add it to the Cutout Library for future use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Aligning cutouts on opposite faces]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial shows you how to create cutouts that are aligned on opposite faces.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Tutorials&amp;diff=238</id>
		<title>Tutorials</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Tutorials&amp;diff=238"/>
				<updated>2012-09-19T18:07:57Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;====[[Creating an enclosure to mount a PCB]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial guides you through the process of creating a custom rackmount enclosure to mount a mini-ITX PCB using self-clinching fasteners, and create cutouts for the PCB, power supply, and fan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial explains how to select the height of self-clinching fasteners, such as standoffs and studs, for mounting components to your enclosures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Determining distance between objects]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial shows techniques for using the Measure tool to accurately place and move objects on a face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Creating a custom cutout for a connector]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial guides you through creating a cutout to fit a custom connector and add it to the Cutout Library for future use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Aligning cutouts on opposite faces]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial shows you how to create cutouts that are aligned on opposite faces.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Window-main-ushape-alignedrectangles.png&amp;diff=237</id>
		<title>File:Window-main-ushape-alignedrectangles.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Window-main-ushape-alignedrectangles.png&amp;diff=237"/>
				<updated>2012-09-19T18:06:07Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-rear-rectangle.png&amp;diff=236</id>
		<title>File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-rear-rectangle.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-rear-rectangle.png&amp;diff=236"/>
				<updated>2012-09-19T18:05:49Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_an_enclosure_to_mount_a_PCB&amp;diff=234</id>
		<title>Creating an enclosure to mount a PCB</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_an_enclosure_to_mount_a_PCB&amp;diff=234"/>
				<updated>2012-09-19T17:16:55Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: /* Add built-in fan cutout to rear panel */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;One of the most common uses for Protocase Designer is to design a custom enclosure to mount a PCB and associated components.&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial will guide you through the process of creating a custom rackmount enclosure to mount a mini-ITX PCB using self-clinching fasteners, and create cutouts for the PCB, power supply, and fan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Select components to mount in enclosure==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Source the components you want to mount in your enclosure&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:photo-mini-ITXPCB.png|250px|center|thumb|Mini-ITX PCB]][[File:photo-fan-60mm.png|100px|center|thumb|60mm Fan]][[File:photo-powersupply.png|200px|center|thumb|Power Supply]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Determine the mounting specifications (i.e. mounting hole and cutout dimensions and locations).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-powersupply-pcb.jpg|600px|thumb|center|Top viewâ€”Sketch of power supply and PCB mounting dimensions]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-powersupply-pcb-rear.jpg|600px|thumb|center|Rear viewâ€”Sketch of power supply and PCB mounting dimensions]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}{{Note|Mounting dimensions are not needed for the 60mm fan since a built-in cutout for the fan will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
}}{{Note|It is important to properly understand how to mount each component including any required clearances.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Sketch mounting locations for components==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Determine mounting location for all components&lt;br /&gt;
#Determine cutout, mounting hole, and self-clinching fastener sizes to mount all components&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a sketch of all required mounting dimensions.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-mounting-dimensions.jpg|600px|thumb|center|Top viewâ€”Sketch of power supply and PCB mounting dimensions]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-mounting-dimensions-rear.jpg|600px|thumb|center|Rear viewâ€”Sketch of power supply and PCB mounting dimensions]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}{{Note|Dimensions are always measured from the absolute origin on the OUTSIDE of the enclosure (i.e. you must factor in the thickness of the enclosure)}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Create enclosure from template==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following&lt;br /&gt;
#*Open Protocase DesignerÂ® and click '''New File'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#*If Protocase DesignerÂ® is already open, on the '''File''' menu, click '''New'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Rackmount Enclosures''', then click '''Rackmount'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-newassembly-rackmount-color.png|500px|thumb|centre|New Assembly window]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a '''Depth''' of 15 (inches) and '''Height''' of 2 (U).&lt;br /&gt;
#Select a color for each panel, as desired and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select 14 (.075) for all thicknesses.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''View''' menu, click '''Show/Hide Parts'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-showhideparts-rackmount.png|300px|thumb|centre|Show/Hide Parts dialog box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to clear the '''Cover''' check box. This will hide the cover allowing you to view the inside of the enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-main-rackmount-nocover.png|400px|thumb|centre|Main windowâ€”rackmount enclosure with cover hidden]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add PCB and power supply cutouts to rear panel==&lt;br /&gt;
This enclosure requires two rectangular cutouts on the rear panel to accommodate the mini-ITX PCB and power supply.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click the rear face. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor windowâ€”rackmount rear face]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Rectangle''' tool. [[File:tool-rectangle.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Draw two rectangles at approximate mounting locations.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear-rectangles.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”rectangle cutouts on rackmount rear face]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Circle''' tool. [[File:tool-circle.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Draw two circles on each side of the right rectangle.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear-circles.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”circle cutouts on rackmount rear face]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select each cutout and update the origin, width, and height as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
#*PCB rectangle cutout (on left)&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 10&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 0.375&lt;br /&gt;
#:Width: 6.25&lt;br /&gt;
#:Height: 1.75&lt;br /&gt;
#*Power Supply rectangle cutout (on right)&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 1.5&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 0.4&lt;br /&gt;
#:Width: 3.2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Height: 1.6&lt;br /&gt;
#*Power Supply circle cutout 1&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 4.85&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 1.2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Diameter: 0.125&lt;br /&gt;
#*Power Supply circle cutout 2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 1.35&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 1.2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Diameter: 0.125&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear-circle-origin.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”updating circle origin]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add built-in fan cutout to rear panel==&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase DesignerÂ® offers a library of cutouts for common components including fans of various sizes.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, point to '''Fans''', '''General''', then click '''60mm'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the fan cutout at the approximate mounting location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear-fan-placing.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor windowâ€”placing fan cutout]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the fan cutout and update the origin as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
#*Fan cutout&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 7.5&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 1.5&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear-fan-origin.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor windowâ€”rack mount with rectangle cutouts and fan cutout]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Accept &amp;amp; Close'''. [[File:button-acceptclose.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add cutouts to chassis==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click the chassis (bottom) of the enclosure. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Inside''' [[File:button-inside.png|60px|middle]] to change the view to the inside of the chassis.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-pem-studs-440-500.png|300px|thumb|center|Self Clinching Fastener dialog boxâ€”selecting studs, 4-40 x .500&amp;quot; long]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select Studs, 4-40 x .500 long and click '''Place PEM'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place two studs at the approximate mounting location for the power supply.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-chassis-studs.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”placing studs, 4-40 x .500&amp;quot; long]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-pem-standoffs-440-375.png|300px|thumb|center|Self Clinching Fastener dialog boxâ€”selecting standoffs, 4-40 x .375&amp;quot; long]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select Standoffs, 4-40 x .375&amp;quot; long and click '''Place PEM'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place four standoffs at the approximate mounting location for the PCB (on the right).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-chassis-standoffs.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor windowâ€”placing standoffs, 4-40 x .375&amp;quot; long]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool.  [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select each standoff and stud and update their origins as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
#*Stud 1&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 1.15&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 6.675&lt;br /&gt;
#*Stud 2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 4.65&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 6.675&lt;br /&gt;
#*Standoff 1&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 9.4&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 14&lt;br /&gt;
#*Standoff 2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 15.65&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 14&lt;br /&gt;
#*Standoff 3&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 9.4&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 8&lt;br /&gt;
#*Standoff 4&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 15.65&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 8&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-chassis-pems-origin.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”studs and standoffs placed in proper locations]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing toolbar''', click '''Accept &amp;amp; Close'''. [[File:button-acceptclose.png|40px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-main-rackmount-pems.png|600px|thumb|center|Main windowâ€”rack mount with studs and standoffs added]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
You can now customize your enclosure further by adding additional cutouts, silkscreen, and hardware to the other faces and then request an instant quote.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_a_custom_cutout_for_a_connector&amp;diff=233</id>
		<title>Creating a custom cutout for a connector</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_a_custom_cutout_for_a_connector&amp;diff=233"/>
				<updated>2012-09-19T17:16:17Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: /* Method 2: Creating objects in the Cutout Editor */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Determine mounting specifications==&lt;br /&gt;
#Determine the mounting specifications (mounting hole and cutout dimensions) for the connector.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-customconnector.png|400px|thumb|center|Custom connector mounting specifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw Cutouts==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two methods to create a custom cutout in the Cutout Library.&lt;br /&gt;
*Method 1â€”Grouping objects and adding to the Cutout Library&lt;br /&gt;
*Method 2â€”Creating objects directly in the Cutout Editor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Method 1: Grouping objects and adding to the Cutout Library====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click a face to edit. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Face Editor''' window, create the cutouts required to mount the connector (such as port and mounting screw cutouts). Use the '''Grid''' or '''Measure''' tool to accurately place each cutout.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-customcutout.png|500px|thumb|center|Several cutouts created to mount a connector]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects to include in your custom cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, click '''Group'''.  A bounding box will appear around the objects and additional commands will appear on the '''Properties''' panel for the group. The origin for the new group is based on the origin of the first object created in the group.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-customcutout-group.png|500px|thumb|center|Several cutouts selected and grouped]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, click '''Add to Library'''. A dialog box opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-addtolibrary.png|600px|thumb|center|Add To Library Dialog Box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#Leave the x and y offset values as-is. The x, y offset defines the position of the bounding box corner relative to the group origin. The width and height define the bounding box size.&lt;br /&gt;
#(Optional) Enter the Manufacturer, Part Number and/or Description.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''. Your custom cutout will now appear in the Cutout Library and '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Method 2: Creating objects in the Cutout Editor====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click a face to edit. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library'''. The '''Cutout Library''' window opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-cutoutlibrary.png|500px|thumb|center|Cutout Library window]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''New Item'''. A dialog box opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-cutoutlibrary-newitem.png|400px|thumb|center|New Item dialog box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the x and y offset values to position the bottom left corner of the bounding box relative to the origin. Entering an x value half of the Width and a y value half of the Height will place the origin in the centre of the bounding box.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the Width and Height of the bounding box for your cutout. All your cutouts should fit within this bounding box area.&lt;br /&gt;
#(Optional) Enter the Manufacturer, Part Number and/or Description.&lt;br /&gt;
#Create your cutouts using the Drawing tools. You can also include silkscreen text and images.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-cutouteditor-connector.png|500px|thumb|center|Creating a custom cutout in the Cutout Editor]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Accept &amp;amp; Close'''. [[File:button-acceptclose.png|40px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Your custom cutout will now appear at the bottom of the Cutout Library item list.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=232</id>
		<title>Face Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=232"/>
				<updated>2012-09-19T17:04:21Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: /* Construction */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Face Editor Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The Face Editor allows you to customize the faces of your enclosure using standard editing tools for creating cutouts, silkscreens, exclusions zones, and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-labels.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Window]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;A. Standard Toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains common commands such as Cut Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo, as well as zoom and grid related commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;B. Drawing Toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains tools to draw shapes, add text, and add images to the face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;C. Viewport&lt;br /&gt;
:Working area that shows a 2D view of your enclosure face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;D. Status bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays the currently selected view, X- and Y coordinates of the pointer, side of face showing (outside or inside), and the name of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;E. Help pane&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays contextual help that changes based on the selected drawing tool.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;F. Properties pane&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays properties that can be changed for the selected object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the face=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Pan model==&lt;br /&gt;
To Pan the face, do one of the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 1'''&lt;br /&gt;
*In the viewport, click the wheel button and drag to pan the model to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 2'''&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard Toolbar''', click '''Pan'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the viewport, left-click and drag to pan the model to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 3'''&lt;br /&gt;
#Press and hold the '''Alt''' key.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the viewport, right-click and drag to pan the model to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zoom model==&lt;br /&gt;
To Zoom in or out, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 1'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Rotate the '''wheel button''' forward or backward.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 2'''&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard Toolbar''' (or on the '''View menu'''), click '''Zoom In''' or '''Zoom Out'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click within the viewport to incrementally zoom the model in or out.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 3'''&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard Toolbar''', click '''Zoom In'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag a diagonal selection within the viewport to zoom in to a desired area of the model.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The model moves toward the mouse pointer when zooming out and away from the mouse pointer when zooming in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reset view==&lt;br /&gt;
The Reset View command displays the face in the centre of the viewport at its original zoom level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 1'''&lt;br /&gt;
*On the '''Standard Toolbar''', click '''Reset View'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 2'''&lt;br /&gt;
*On the '''View''' menu, click '''Reset Zoom'''  to display the model in its original orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Coordinate System=&lt;br /&gt;
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|thumb|center|Face Editor Coordinate System]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Drawing shapes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Select the drawing mode==&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a drawing mode changes the type of objects created using the drawing tools as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Cutouts===&lt;br /&gt;
Cutout drawing mode allows you to draw shapes on your enclosure for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, etc. You can also draw custom shapes to create cutout logos and images.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Silkscreen===&lt;br /&gt;
Silkscreen drawing mode allows you to draw shapes, images, and text on your enclosure for labelling or adding logos and product identifier graphics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Exclusion===&lt;br /&gt;
Exclusion drawing mode allows you to add shapes to your enclosure to mark areas where other objects cannot be added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Construction===&lt;br /&gt;
Construction drawing mode allows you to draw shapes on your enclosure for use as reference when creating cutouts, silkscreen or exclusion zones, as well as when placing hardware.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', click the '''Mode''' button [[File:button-mode.png||60px|bottom]]. A pop-out window appears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:button-drawmode.png|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click a draw type to set the default drawing mode. The drawing tool icons will change color to reflect the default drawing mode.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw circles==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-circle.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-circle-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-circle-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-circle-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Circle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the centre of the circle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing circles and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw ellipses==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-ellipse.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-ellipse-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-ellipse-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-ellipse-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Ellipse''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the centre of the ellipse.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing ellipses and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw rectangles==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-rectangle.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-rectangle-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-rectangle-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-rectangle-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the corner of the rectangle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing rectangles and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw squares==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-rectangle.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-rectangle-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-rectangle-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-rectangle-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Method 1=====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Standard''' toolbar click '''Toggle Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid and automatically turn on snap to grid.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the corner of the rectangle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box, using the grid to restrict the bounding box to a square.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing squares or rectangles and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
=====Method 2=====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the corner of the rectangle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box. You will convert the rectangle to a square in the next step.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Properties''' pane, change the Width and Height to be equal.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing squares or rectangles and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw custom paths==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-path.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-path-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-path-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-path-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the Path tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place points of the path.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create an arc using the '''Path''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Start creating a path as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; Click '''arc''' on the '''Properties''' panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; Press the '''A''' key.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the end of the arc&lt;br /&gt;
#Move the pointer to change the size of the arc and click to place the arc.&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; Continue placing arcs.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; Click '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or press the '''A''' key to continue placing lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw lines==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-line.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-line-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-line-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-line-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Line''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to start the line.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the end of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing new lines and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add text==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Silkscreen [[File:tool-text.png|40px|bottom]] drawing mode only.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Selecting the Image Tool will switch the drawing mode to Silkscreen, regardless of the current drawing mode.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Text''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face and begin typing to insert a text block.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click in a other locations to add additional text blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue adding text blocks and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add images==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Silkscreen [[File:tool-image.png|40px|bottom]] drawing mode only.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Selecting the Image Tool will switch the drawing mode to Silkscreen, regardless of the current drawing mode.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Image tool'''. An Open dialog box appears.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select an image file, such as a custom logo, and click '''Open'''.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Measure distances==&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Measure''' tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Measure''' tool. [[File:tool-measure.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*Click Snap to force measurements from key points on objects (e.g. corners and centres)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Click Free to allow measurements from any point&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the start point.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the end point. The x, y, and total distances are displayed on the '''Properties''' panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue measuring distances and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-measure.png|600px|thumb|centre|Measuring distance between objects]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Grid==&lt;br /&gt;
The grid is useful to help accurately place and align objects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turn on/off the Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Toggle Grid. [[File:button-togglegrid.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click Toggle Grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of the grid.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Snap to Grid option is automatically enabled when the grid is turned on.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-grid.png|600px|thumb|centre|Grid on with 2 in width and height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turn on/off Snap to Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Snap to Grid [[File:button-snapgrid.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click Snap to Grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of Snap to Grid.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Change Grid Size and Offset===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Grid Size [[File:button-gridsize.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click Grid Size.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-faceeditor-gridsize.png|thumb|centre|Grid Size Dialog Box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Grid Size dialog box, change any of the following values:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Width'''â€”horizontal distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Height'''â€”vertical distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Offset Width'''â€”horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Offset Height'''â€”vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Grid Opacity'''â€”opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Save as Default Grid Size'''â€”use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check Save as Default Grid Size, the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor Window, even if you re-open the same face.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-gridoffset.png|600px|thumb|centre|Grid with 2 in width and height, 1 in Offset Width and Offset Height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Changing object properties==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-circle-silkscreen.png|thumb|Properties Pane for circle silkscreen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-text-silkscreen.png|thumb|Properties Pane for text silkscreen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fill===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to silkscreen and construction objects including circles, ellipses, rectangles, and paths.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Line Thickness===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to silkscreen and construction objects including circles, ellipses, rectangles, paths, and lines.''&lt;br /&gt;
''Also applies to lines of all object types.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to silkscreen objects including circles, ellipses, rectangles, paths, lines, and text.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a color from the '''Color''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
* Refer to [http://www.protocase.com/products/mcf_silkscreen.php Stocked Silkscreening Colors] for a list of available colours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Type===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to all objects.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* Object types include:&lt;br /&gt;
:Cutout&lt;br /&gt;
:Silkscreen&lt;br /&gt;
:Exclusion&lt;br /&gt;
:Construction&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Origin===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to all objects.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the location of the X and Y origins with respect to the absolute coordinate system.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.&lt;br /&gt;
* [image]&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Circles'''â€”centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Ellipses'''â€”centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Rectangles'''â€”corner closes to the absolute origin&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Text'''â€”bottom left corner&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Paths'''â€”start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Lines'''â€”start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Images'''â€”bottom left corner&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Size===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to all objects (options displayed depend on object selected).''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* All values use the default Display Units, unless otherwise specified.  See Preferences [add link] to change the default Display Units.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Circles'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Radius, Diameter'''â€”Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Ellipses'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusX'''â€”Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusY'''â€”Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).&lt;br /&gt;
'''Rectangles'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height'''â€”Width and Height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation'''â€”Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
'''Text'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation'''â€”Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font'''â€”Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, or Bookman.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Size'''â€”Change the font size within the available range of 7â€“99.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Style'''â€”Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Text'''â€”Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Path'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation'''â€”Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
'''Lines'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Length'''â€”Distance from origin to end point.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Images'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height'''â€”Width and height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation'''â€”Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding built-in cutouts=&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase DesignerÂ® also offers a variety of built-in cutouts that you can add to your enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To quickly place an existing item from the cutout library:&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]] and click a face to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, point to a category and then click an item.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-DB9menu.png|600px|thumb|centre]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the built-in cutout.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-db9.png|600px|thumb|centre]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|You can also open the Cutout Library window to perform more tasks such as creating or editing cutouts. On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library'''. See [[Cutout Library]] for further information.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding custom cutouts=&lt;br /&gt;
You can add custom cutouts from the Cutout Library using the same method as adding built-in cutouts. See [[#Adding_built-in_cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*The '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu contains all the items in the Cutout Library.&lt;br /&gt;
*See [[Cutout Library]] for details on creating custom cutouts in the Cutout Library window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding hardware=&lt;br /&gt;
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners to mount a PCB or handles. Protocase uses common PEMÂ® brand self-clinching fasteners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add self-clinching fasteners==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]] and click a face to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Toggle Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid and automatically turn on snap to grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#From the Cutout Library, select the type of Self Clinching Fastener and its options.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-pem.png|centre|Self-Clinching Fasteners Dialog Box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Place PEM''' and click the face to add the fasteners.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue adding fasteners and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-pem.png|600px|thumb|centre|Placing Self-Clinching Fasteners]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-main-pem.png|600px|thumb|centre|Self-Clinching Fasteners on bottom face (cover hidden)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add mounting hardware==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]] and click a face to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Toggle Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid and automatically turn on snap to grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, point to Hardware, then click a hardware item.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue adding mounting hardware and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-handles.png|600px|thumb|centre|Placing handles]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-main-ushape-handles.png|600px|thumb|centre|U-Shape enclosure with handles]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Manipulating objects=&lt;br /&gt;
==Select object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select multiple objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#** click the first object, press and hold the Shift key, then click other objects;&lt;br /&gt;
#**or click and drag a selection box over several objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-selection.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”selecting multiple objects by dragging a selection box]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Move object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To move a single object:{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move several objects:{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Align and distribute objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Select 2 or more objects. The Alignment and Distribute commands appear on the '''Properties''' panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, click an alignment or distribute command.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alignment'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Notes:'''''&lt;br /&gt;
*Objects align to first object selected&lt;br /&gt;
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-align.png|600px|thumb|centre|Objects with bottoms aligned and centers distributed evenly]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Distribute'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cut, Copy, and Paste objects==&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands to easily create multiple copies of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Select one or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Edit''' menu, select '''Cut''', '''Copy''', or '''Paste'''. A copy of the object(s) will appear next to the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the object(s) on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Undo and Redo actions==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Edit''' menu, select '''Undo''' or '''Redo'''.}}{{Note|You can Undo or Redo multiple times by repeatably selecting Undo or Redo.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Exporting a Face and Silkscreen Templates=&lt;br /&gt;
==Export Face==&lt;br /&gt;
You can export an image file (png format) of a face for use in presentations or to review the design.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Silkscreen''' menu, click '''Export Face to Bitmap for Presentation'''. A Save dialog box opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type a name for the image file and click '''Save'''.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Export/Import Silkscreen Template==&lt;br /&gt;
You can export an image file (png format) of a face to create a silkscreen template for editing in a 3rd party image program and importing back onto a face as a silkscreen image.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Silkscreen''' menu, click '''Export Silkscreen Template'''. A Save dialog box opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type a name for the image file and click '''Save'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the image file in an image editing program and design your silkscreen images.&lt;br /&gt;
#Save the image file (png format) in the image editing program.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Silkscreen''' menu, click '''Import Silkscreen Template'''. The image will be imported and placed on the face as a silkscreen image.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Face Editor Preferences=&lt;br /&gt;
You can change several parameters for controlling the Face Editor functionality.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:dialogbox-preferences.png|400px|thumb|centre|Preferences dialog box]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Edit''' Menu, click '''Preferences'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Preferences''' dialog box, change any of the following values:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Display Units'''â€”used for drawing/editing objects and measuring distances. On the '''Display Units''' menu, click '''INCHES''' or '''MM'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Grid Size X, Grid Size Y'''â€”the horizontal and vertical space between grid lines. Type a number or click the up/down arrows to change the value in 0.1 increments.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Precision Digits'''â€”the number of units displayed when drawing/editing objects and measuring distances. Type a number or click the up/down arrows to change the value in 0.1 increments.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Grid Opacity'''â€”opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Allow Free Editing'''â€”Enable or disable the ability to move or change the size of objects directly on the face. Clear the check box to prevent accidentally moving or changing the size of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Prompt for Whether to Reject Bad Moves'''â€”Displays a warning if you move an object outside a face boundary or overlapping an exclusion zone. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Reject Bad Moves'''â€”Prevents you from moving an object outside a face boundary or overlapping an exclusion zone. The object is automatically moved back to its original position.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Never Show Whatâ€™s New'''â€”Disables a dialog box at startup showing the new features of Protocase DesignerÂ®.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Show Whatâ€™s New for this version'''â€”Displays a dialog box at startup showing the new features for the current version of Protocase DesignerÂ®.}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=231</id>
		<title>Face Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=231"/>
				<updated>2012-09-19T17:03:58Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: /* Construction */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Face Editor Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The Face Editor allows you to customize the faces of your enclosure using standard editing tools for creating cutouts, silkscreens, exclusions zones, and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-labels.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Window]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;A. Standard Toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains common commands such as Cut Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo, as well as zoom and grid related commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;B. Drawing Toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains tools to draw shapes, add text, and add images to the face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;C. Viewport&lt;br /&gt;
:Working area that shows a 2D view of your enclosure face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;D. Status bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays the currently selected view, X- and Y coordinates of the pointer, side of face showing (outside or inside), and the name of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;E. Help pane&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays contextual help that changes based on the selected drawing tool.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;F. Properties pane&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays properties that can be changed for the selected object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the face=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Pan model==&lt;br /&gt;
To Pan the face, do one of the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 1'''&lt;br /&gt;
*In the viewport, click the wheel button and drag to pan the model to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 2'''&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard Toolbar''', click '''Pan'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the viewport, left-click and drag to pan the model to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 3'''&lt;br /&gt;
#Press and hold the '''Alt''' key.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the viewport, right-click and drag to pan the model to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zoom model==&lt;br /&gt;
To Zoom in or out, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 1'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Rotate the '''wheel button''' forward or backward.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 2'''&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard Toolbar''' (or on the '''View menu'''), click '''Zoom In''' or '''Zoom Out'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click within the viewport to incrementally zoom the model in or out.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 3'''&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard Toolbar''', click '''Zoom In'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag a diagonal selection within the viewport to zoom in to a desired area of the model.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The model moves toward the mouse pointer when zooming out and away from the mouse pointer when zooming in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reset view==&lt;br /&gt;
The Reset View command displays the face in the centre of the viewport at its original zoom level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 1'''&lt;br /&gt;
*On the '''Standard Toolbar''', click '''Reset View'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 2'''&lt;br /&gt;
*On the '''View''' menu, click '''Reset Zoom'''  to display the model in its original orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Coordinate System=&lt;br /&gt;
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|thumb|center|Face Editor Coordinate System]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Drawing shapes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Select the drawing mode==&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a drawing mode changes the type of objects created using the drawing tools as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Cutouts===&lt;br /&gt;
Cutout drawing mode allows you to draw shapes on your enclosure for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, etc. You can also draw custom shapes to create cutout logos and images.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Silkscreen===&lt;br /&gt;
Silkscreen drawing mode allows you to draw shapes, images, and text on your enclosure for labelling or adding logos and product identifier graphics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Exclusion===&lt;br /&gt;
Exclusion drawing mode allows you to add shapes to your enclosure to mark areas where other objects cannot be added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Construction===&lt;br /&gt;
Construction drawing mode allows you to draw shapes on your enclosure for use as reference when creating cutouts, silkscreen or exclusion zones, as well as when placing hardware.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', click the '''Mode''' button [[File:button-mode.png||40px|bottom]]. A pop-out window appears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:button-drawmode.png|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click a draw type to set the default drawing mode. The drawing tool icons will change color to reflect the default drawing mode.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw circles==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-circle.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-circle-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-circle-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-circle-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Circle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the centre of the circle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing circles and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw ellipses==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-ellipse.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-ellipse-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-ellipse-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-ellipse-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Ellipse''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the centre of the ellipse.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing ellipses and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw rectangles==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-rectangle.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-rectangle-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-rectangle-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-rectangle-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the corner of the rectangle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing rectangles and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw squares==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-rectangle.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-rectangle-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-rectangle-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-rectangle-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Method 1=====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Standard''' toolbar click '''Toggle Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid and automatically turn on snap to grid.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the corner of the rectangle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box, using the grid to restrict the bounding box to a square.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing squares or rectangles and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
=====Method 2=====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the corner of the rectangle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box. You will convert the rectangle to a square in the next step.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Properties''' pane, change the Width and Height to be equal.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing squares or rectangles and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw custom paths==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-path.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-path-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-path-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-path-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the Path tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place points of the path.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create an arc using the '''Path''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Start creating a path as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; Click '''arc''' on the '''Properties''' panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; Press the '''A''' key.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the end of the arc&lt;br /&gt;
#Move the pointer to change the size of the arc and click to place the arc.&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; Continue placing arcs.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; Click '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or press the '''A''' key to continue placing lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw lines==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-line.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-line-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-line-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-line-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Line''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to start the line.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the end of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing new lines and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add text==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Silkscreen [[File:tool-text.png|40px|bottom]] drawing mode only.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Selecting the Image Tool will switch the drawing mode to Silkscreen, regardless of the current drawing mode.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Text''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face and begin typing to insert a text block.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click in a other locations to add additional text blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue adding text blocks and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add images==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Silkscreen [[File:tool-image.png|40px|bottom]] drawing mode only.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Selecting the Image Tool will switch the drawing mode to Silkscreen, regardless of the current drawing mode.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Image tool'''. An Open dialog box appears.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select an image file, such as a custom logo, and click '''Open'''.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Measure distances==&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Measure''' tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Measure''' tool. [[File:tool-measure.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*Click Snap to force measurements from key points on objects (e.g. corners and centres)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Click Free to allow measurements from any point&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the start point.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the end point. The x, y, and total distances are displayed on the '''Properties''' panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue measuring distances and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-measure.png|600px|thumb|centre|Measuring distance between objects]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Grid==&lt;br /&gt;
The grid is useful to help accurately place and align objects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turn on/off the Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Toggle Grid. [[File:button-togglegrid.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click Toggle Grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of the grid.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Snap to Grid option is automatically enabled when the grid is turned on.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-grid.png|600px|thumb|centre|Grid on with 2 in width and height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turn on/off Snap to Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Snap to Grid [[File:button-snapgrid.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click Snap to Grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of Snap to Grid.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Change Grid Size and Offset===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Grid Size [[File:button-gridsize.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click Grid Size.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-faceeditor-gridsize.png|thumb|centre|Grid Size Dialog Box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Grid Size dialog box, change any of the following values:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Width'''â€”horizontal distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Height'''â€”vertical distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Offset Width'''â€”horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Offset Height'''â€”vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Grid Opacity'''â€”opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Save as Default Grid Size'''â€”use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check Save as Default Grid Size, the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor Window, even if you re-open the same face.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-gridoffset.png|600px|thumb|centre|Grid with 2 in width and height, 1 in Offset Width and Offset Height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Changing object properties==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-circle-silkscreen.png|thumb|Properties Pane for circle silkscreen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-text-silkscreen.png|thumb|Properties Pane for text silkscreen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fill===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to silkscreen and construction objects including circles, ellipses, rectangles, and paths.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Line Thickness===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to silkscreen and construction objects including circles, ellipses, rectangles, paths, and lines.''&lt;br /&gt;
''Also applies to lines of all object types.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to silkscreen objects including circles, ellipses, rectangles, paths, lines, and text.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a color from the '''Color''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
* Refer to [http://www.protocase.com/products/mcf_silkscreen.php Stocked Silkscreening Colors] for a list of available colours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Type===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to all objects.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* Object types include:&lt;br /&gt;
:Cutout&lt;br /&gt;
:Silkscreen&lt;br /&gt;
:Exclusion&lt;br /&gt;
:Construction&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Origin===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to all objects.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the location of the X and Y origins with respect to the absolute coordinate system.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.&lt;br /&gt;
* [image]&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Circles'''â€”centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Ellipses'''â€”centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Rectangles'''â€”corner closes to the absolute origin&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Text'''â€”bottom left corner&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Paths'''â€”start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Lines'''â€”start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Images'''â€”bottom left corner&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Size===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to all objects (options displayed depend on object selected).''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* All values use the default Display Units, unless otherwise specified.  See Preferences [add link] to change the default Display Units.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Circles'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Radius, Diameter'''â€”Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Ellipses'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusX'''â€”Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusY'''â€”Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).&lt;br /&gt;
'''Rectangles'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height'''â€”Width and Height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation'''â€”Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
'''Text'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation'''â€”Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font'''â€”Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, or Bookman.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Size'''â€”Change the font size within the available range of 7â€“99.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Style'''â€”Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Text'''â€”Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Path'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation'''â€”Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
'''Lines'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Length'''â€”Distance from origin to end point.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Images'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height'''â€”Width and height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation'''â€”Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding built-in cutouts=&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase DesignerÂ® also offers a variety of built-in cutouts that you can add to your enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To quickly place an existing item from the cutout library:&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]] and click a face to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, point to a category and then click an item.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-DB9menu.png|600px|thumb|centre]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the built-in cutout.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-db9.png|600px|thumb|centre]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|You can also open the Cutout Library window to perform more tasks such as creating or editing cutouts. On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library'''. See [[Cutout Library]] for further information.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding custom cutouts=&lt;br /&gt;
You can add custom cutouts from the Cutout Library using the same method as adding built-in cutouts. See [[#Adding_built-in_cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*The '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu contains all the items in the Cutout Library.&lt;br /&gt;
*See [[Cutout Library]] for details on creating custom cutouts in the Cutout Library window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding hardware=&lt;br /&gt;
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners to mount a PCB or handles. Protocase uses common PEMÂ® brand self-clinching fasteners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add self-clinching fasteners==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]] and click a face to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Toggle Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid and automatically turn on snap to grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#From the Cutout Library, select the type of Self Clinching Fastener and its options.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-pem.png|centre|Self-Clinching Fasteners Dialog Box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Place PEM''' and click the face to add the fasteners.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue adding fasteners and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-pem.png|600px|thumb|centre|Placing Self-Clinching Fasteners]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-main-pem.png|600px|thumb|centre|Self-Clinching Fasteners on bottom face (cover hidden)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add mounting hardware==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]] and click a face to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Toggle Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid and automatically turn on snap to grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, point to Hardware, then click a hardware item.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue adding mounting hardware and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-handles.png|600px|thumb|centre|Placing handles]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-main-ushape-handles.png|600px|thumb|centre|U-Shape enclosure with handles]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Manipulating objects=&lt;br /&gt;
==Select object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select multiple objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#** click the first object, press and hold the Shift key, then click other objects;&lt;br /&gt;
#**or click and drag a selection box over several objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-selection.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”selecting multiple objects by dragging a selection box]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Move object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To move a single object:{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move several objects:{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Align and distribute objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Select 2 or more objects. The Alignment and Distribute commands appear on the '''Properties''' panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, click an alignment or distribute command.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alignment'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Notes:'''''&lt;br /&gt;
*Objects align to first object selected&lt;br /&gt;
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-align.png|600px|thumb|centre|Objects with bottoms aligned and centers distributed evenly]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Distribute'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cut, Copy, and Paste objects==&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands to easily create multiple copies of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Select one or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Edit''' menu, select '''Cut''', '''Copy''', or '''Paste'''. A copy of the object(s) will appear next to the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the object(s) on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Undo and Redo actions==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Edit''' menu, select '''Undo''' or '''Redo'''.}}{{Note|You can Undo or Redo multiple times by repeatably selecting Undo or Redo.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Exporting a Face and Silkscreen Templates=&lt;br /&gt;
==Export Face==&lt;br /&gt;
You can export an image file (png format) of a face for use in presentations or to review the design.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Silkscreen''' menu, click '''Export Face to Bitmap for Presentation'''. A Save dialog box opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type a name for the image file and click '''Save'''.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Export/Import Silkscreen Template==&lt;br /&gt;
You can export an image file (png format) of a face to create a silkscreen template for editing in a 3rd party image program and importing back onto a face as a silkscreen image.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Silkscreen''' menu, click '''Export Silkscreen Template'''. A Save dialog box opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type a name for the image file and click '''Save'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the image file in an image editing program and design your silkscreen images.&lt;br /&gt;
#Save the image file (png format) in the image editing program.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Silkscreen''' menu, click '''Import Silkscreen Template'''. The image will be imported and placed on the face as a silkscreen image.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Face Editor Preferences=&lt;br /&gt;
You can change several parameters for controlling the Face Editor functionality.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:dialogbox-preferences.png|400px|thumb|centre|Preferences dialog box]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Edit''' Menu, click '''Preferences'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Preferences''' dialog box, change any of the following values:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Display Units'''â€”used for drawing/editing objects and measuring distances. On the '''Display Units''' menu, click '''INCHES''' or '''MM'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Grid Size X, Grid Size Y'''â€”the horizontal and vertical space between grid lines. Type a number or click the up/down arrows to change the value in 0.1 increments.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Precision Digits'''â€”the number of units displayed when drawing/editing objects and measuring distances. Type a number or click the up/down arrows to change the value in 0.1 increments.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Grid Opacity'''â€”opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Allow Free Editing'''â€”Enable or disable the ability to move or change the size of objects directly on the face. Clear the check box to prevent accidentally moving or changing the size of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Prompt for Whether to Reject Bad Moves'''â€”Displays a warning if you move an object outside a face boundary or overlapping an exclusion zone. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Reject Bad Moves'''â€”Prevents you from moving an object outside a face boundary or overlapping an exclusion zone. The object is automatically moved back to its original position.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Never Show Whatâ€™s New'''â€”Disables a dialog box at startup showing the new features of Protocase DesignerÂ®.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Show Whatâ€™s New for this version'''â€”Displays a dialog box at startup showing the new features for the current version of Protocase DesignerÂ®.}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Diagram-coordinates.png&amp;diff=230</id>
		<title>File:Diagram-coordinates.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Diagram-coordinates.png&amp;diff=230"/>
				<updated>2012-09-19T17:02:43Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: Tchen uploaded a new version of &amp;amp;quot;File:Diagram-coordinates.png&amp;amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_a_custom_cutout_for_a_connector&amp;diff=229</id>
		<title>Creating a custom cutout for a connector</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_a_custom_cutout_for_a_connector&amp;diff=229"/>
				<updated>2012-09-19T15:13:47Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: /* Method 2: Creating objects in the Cutout Editor */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Determine mounting specifications==&lt;br /&gt;
#Determine the mounting specifications (mounting hole and cutout dimensions) for the connector.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-customconnector.png|400px|thumb|center|Custom connector mounting specifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw Cutouts==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two methods to create a custom cutout in the Cutout Library.&lt;br /&gt;
*Method 1â€”Grouping objects and adding to the Cutout Library&lt;br /&gt;
*Method 2â€”Creating objects directly in the Cutout Editor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Method 1: Grouping objects and adding to the Cutout Library====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click a face to edit. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Face Editor''' window, create the cutouts required to mount the connector (such as port and mounting screw cutouts). Use the '''Grid''' or '''Measure''' tool to accurately place each cutout.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-customcutout.png|500px|thumb|center|Several cutouts created to mount a connector]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects to include in your custom cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, click '''Group'''.  A bounding box will appear around the objects and additional commands will appear on the '''Properties''' panel for the group. The origin for the new group is based on the origin of the first object created in the group.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-customcutout-group.png|500px|thumb|center|Several cutouts selected and grouped]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, click '''Add to Library'''. A dialog box opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-addtolibrary.png|600px|thumb|center|Add To Library Dialog Box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#Leave the x and y offset values as-is. The x, y offset defines the position of the bounding box corner relative to the group origin. The width and height define the bounding box size.&lt;br /&gt;
#(Optional) Enter the Manufacturer, Part Number and/or Description.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''. Your custom cutout will now appear in the Cutout Library and '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Method 2: Creating objects in the Cutout Editor====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click a face to edit. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library'''. The '''Cutout Library''' window opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-cutoutlibrary.png|500px|thumb|center|Cutout Library window]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''New Item'''. A dialog box opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-cutoutlibrary-newitem.png|400px|thumb|center|New Item dialog box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the x and y offset values to position the bottom left corner of the bounding box relative to the origin. Entering an x value half of the Width and a y value half of the Height will place the origin in the centre of the bounding box.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the Width and Height of the bounding box for your cutout. All your cutouts should fit within this bounding box area.&lt;br /&gt;
#(Optional) Enter the Manufacturer, Part Number and/or Description.&lt;br /&gt;
#Create your cutouts using the Drawing tools. You can also include silkscreen text and images.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-cutouteditor-connector.png|500px|thumb|center|Creating a custom cutout in the Cutout Editor]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, click '''Accept &amp;amp; Close'''. [[File:button-acceptclose.png|40px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Your custom cutout will now appear at the bottom of the Cutout Library item list.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_a_custom_cutout_for_a_connector&amp;diff=228</id>
		<title>Creating a custom cutout for a connector</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_a_custom_cutout_for_a_connector&amp;diff=228"/>
				<updated>2012-09-19T15:10:20Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: /* Draw Cutouts */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Determine mounting specifications==&lt;br /&gt;
#Determine the mounting specifications (mounting hole and cutout dimensions) for the connector.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-customconnector.png|400px|thumb|center|Custom connector mounting specifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw Cutouts==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two methods to create a custom cutout in the Cutout Library.&lt;br /&gt;
*Method 1â€”Grouping objects and adding to the Cutout Library&lt;br /&gt;
*Method 2â€”Creating objects directly in the Cutout Editor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Method 1: Grouping objects and adding to the Cutout Library====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click a face to edit. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Face Editor''' window, create the cutouts required to mount the connector (such as port and mounting screw cutouts). Use the '''Grid''' or '''Measure''' tool to accurately place each cutout.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-customcutout.png|500px|thumb|center|Several cutouts created to mount a connector]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects to include in your custom cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, click '''Group'''.  A bounding box will appear around the objects and additional commands will appear on the '''Properties''' panel for the group. The origin for the new group is based on the origin of the first object created in the group.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-customcutout-group.png|500px|thumb|center|Several cutouts selected and grouped]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, click '''Add to Library'''. A dialog box opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-addtolibrary.png|600px|thumb|center|Add To Library Dialog Box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#Leave the x and y offset values as-is. The x, y offset defines the position of the bounding box corner relative to the group origin. The width and height define the bounding box size.&lt;br /&gt;
#(Optional) Enter the Manufacturer, Part Number and/or Description.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''. Your custom cutout will now appear in the Cutout Library and '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Method 2: Creating objects in the Cutout Editor====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click a face to edit. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library'''. The '''Cutout Library''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''New Item'''. A dialog box opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-cutoutlibrary-newitem.png|400px|thumb|center|New Item dialog box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the x and y offset values to position the bottom left corner of the bounding box relative to the origin. Entering an x value half of the width and a y value half of the height will place the origin in the centre of the bounding box.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the Width and Height of the bounding box for your cutout. All your cutouts should fit within this bounding box area.&lt;br /&gt;
#(Optional) Enter the Manufacturer, Part Number and/or Description.&lt;br /&gt;
#Create your cutouts using the Drawing tools. You can also include silkscreen text and images.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-cutouteditor-connector.png|500px|thumb|center|Creating a custom cutout in the Cutout Editor]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, click '''Accept &amp;amp; Close'''. [[File:button-acceptclose.png|40px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Your custom cutout will now appear at the bottom of the Cutout Library item list.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_a_custom_cutout_for_a_connector&amp;diff=227</id>
		<title>Creating a custom cutout for a connector</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_a_custom_cutout_for_a_connector&amp;diff=227"/>
				<updated>2012-09-19T14:17:58Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: /* Draw Cutouts */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Determine mounting specifications==&lt;br /&gt;
#Determine the mounting specifications (mounting hole and cutout dimensions) for the connector.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-customconnector.png|400px|thumb|center|Custom connector mounting specifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw Cutouts==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two methods to create a custom cutout in the Cutout Library.&lt;br /&gt;
*Method 1â€”Grouping objects and adding to library&lt;br /&gt;
*Method 2â€”Creating objects directly in the Cutout Editor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Method 1: Grouping objects and adding to library====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click a face to edit. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Face Editor''' window, create the cutouts required to mount the connector (such as port and mounting screw cutouts). Use the '''Grid''' or '''Measure''' tool to accurately place each cutout.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-customcutout.png|500px|thumb|center|Several cutouts created to mount a connector]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects to include in your custom cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, click '''Group'''.  A bounding box will appear around the objects and additional commands will appear on the '''Properties''' panel for the group. The origin for the new group is based on the origin of the first object created in the group.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-customcutout-group.png|500px|thumb|center|Several cutouts selected and grouped]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, click '''Add to Library'''. A dialog box opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-addtolibrary.png|600px|thumb|center|Add To Library Dialog Box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#Leave the x and y offset values as-is. The x, y offset defines the position of the bounding box corner relative to the group origin. The width and height define the bounding box size.&lt;br /&gt;
#(Optional) Enter the Manufacturer, Part Number and/or Description.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''. Your custom cutout will now appear in the Cutout Library and '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Method 2: Creating objects in the Cutout Editor====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click a face to edit. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library'''. The '''Cutout Library''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''New Item'''. A dialog box opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-cutoutlibrary-newitem.png|400px|thumb|center|New Item dialog box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the x and y offset values to position the bottom left corner of the bounding box relative to the origin. Entering an x value half of the width and a y value half of the height will place the origin in the centre of the bounding box.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the Width and Height of the bounding box for your cutout. All your cutouts should fit within this bounding box area.&lt;br /&gt;
#(Optional) Enter the Manufacturer, Part Number and/or Description.&lt;br /&gt;
#Create your cutouts using the Drawing tools. You can also include silkscreen text and images.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-cutouteditor-connector.png|500px|thumb|center|Creating a custom cutout in the Cutout Editor]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, click '''Accept &amp;amp; Close'''. [[File:button-acceptclose.png|40px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Your custom cutout will now appear at the bottom of the Cutout Library item list.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_a_custom_cutout_for_a_connector&amp;diff=226</id>
		<title>Creating a custom cutout for a connector</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_a_custom_cutout_for_a_connector&amp;diff=226"/>
				<updated>2012-09-19T14:17:44Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: /* Method 2: Creating objects in Cutout Editor */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Determine mounting specifications==&lt;br /&gt;
#Determine the mounting specifications (mounting hole and cutout dimensions) for the connector.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-customconnector.png|400px|thumb|center|Custom connector mounting specifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw Cutouts==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two methods to create a custom cutout in the Cutout Library.&lt;br /&gt;
*Method 1â€”Grouping objects and adding to library&lt;br /&gt;
*Method 2â€”Creating objects directly in Cutout Library&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Method 1: Grouping objects and adding to library====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click a face to edit. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Face Editor''' window, create the cutouts required to mount the connector (such as port and mounting screw cutouts). Use the '''Grid''' or '''Measure''' tool to accurately place each cutout.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-customcutout.png|500px|thumb|center|Several cutouts created to mount a connector]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects to include in your custom cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, click '''Group'''.  A bounding box will appear around the objects and additional commands will appear on the '''Properties''' panel for the group. The origin for the new group is based on the origin of the first object created in the group.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-customcutout-group.png|500px|thumb|center|Several cutouts selected and grouped]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, click '''Add to Library'''. A dialog box opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-addtolibrary.png|600px|thumb|center|Add To Library Dialog Box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#Leave the x and y offset values as-is. The x, y offset defines the position of the bounding box corner relative to the group origin. The width and height define the bounding box size.&lt;br /&gt;
#(Optional) Enter the Manufacturer, Part Number and/or Description.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''. Your custom cutout will now appear in the Cutout Library and '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Method 2: Creating objects in the Cutout Editor====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click a face to edit. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library'''. The '''Cutout Library''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''New Item'''. A dialog box opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-cutoutlibrary-newitem.png|400px|thumb|center|New Item dialog box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the x and y offset values to position the bottom left corner of the bounding box relative to the origin. Entering an x value half of the width and a y value half of the height will place the origin in the centre of the bounding box.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the Width and Height of the bounding box for your cutout. All your cutouts should fit within this bounding box area.&lt;br /&gt;
#(Optional) Enter the Manufacturer, Part Number and/or Description.&lt;br /&gt;
#Create your cutouts using the Drawing tools. You can also include silkscreen text and images.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-cutouteditor-connector.png|500px|thumb|center|Creating a custom cutout in the Cutout Editor]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, click '''Accept &amp;amp; Close'''. [[File:button-acceptclose.png|40px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Your custom cutout will now appear at the bottom of the Cutout Library item list.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_a_custom_cutout_for_a_connector&amp;diff=225</id>
		<title>Creating a custom cutout for a connector</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_a_custom_cutout_for_a_connector&amp;diff=225"/>
				<updated>2012-09-19T14:17:10Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: /* Determine mounting specifications */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Determine mounting specifications==&lt;br /&gt;
#Determine the mounting specifications (mounting hole and cutout dimensions) for the connector.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-customconnector.png|400px|thumb|center|Custom connector mounting specifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw Cutouts==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two methods to create a custom cutout in the Cutout Library.&lt;br /&gt;
*Method 1â€”Grouping objects and adding to library&lt;br /&gt;
*Method 2â€”Creating objects directly in Cutout Library&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Method 1: Grouping objects and adding to library====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click a face to edit. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Face Editor''' window, create the cutouts required to mount the connector (such as port and mounting screw cutouts). Use the '''Grid''' or '''Measure''' tool to accurately place each cutout.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-customcutout.png|500px|thumb|center|Several cutouts created to mount a connector]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects to include in your custom cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, click '''Group'''.  A bounding box will appear around the objects and additional commands will appear on the '''Properties''' panel for the group. The origin for the new group is based on the origin of the first object created in the group.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-customcutout-group.png|500px|thumb|center|Several cutouts selected and grouped]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, click '''Add to Library'''. A dialog box opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-addtolibrary.png|600px|thumb|center|Add To Library Dialog Box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#Leave the x and y offset values as-is. The x, y offset defines the position of the bounding box corner relative to the group origin. The width and height define the bounding box size.&lt;br /&gt;
#(Optional) Enter the Manufacturer, Part Number and/or Description.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''. Your custom cutout will now appear in the Cutout Library and '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Method 2: Creating objects in Cutout Editor====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click a face to edit. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library'''. The '''Cutout Library''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''New Item'''. A dialog box opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-cutoutlibrary-newitem.png|400px|thumb|center|New Item dialog box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the x and y offset values to position the bottom left corner of the bounding box relative to the origin. Entering an x value half of the width and a y value half of the height will place the origin in the centre of the bounding box.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the Width and Height of the bounding box for your cutout. All your cutouts should fit within this bounding box area.&lt;br /&gt;
#(Optional) Enter the Manufacturer, Part Number and/or Description.&lt;br /&gt;
#Create your cutouts using the Drawing tools. You can also include silkscreen text and images.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-cutouteditor-connector.png|500px|thumb|center|Creating a custom cutout in the Cutout Editor]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, click '''Accept &amp;amp; Close'''. [[File:button-acceptclose.png|40px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Your custom cutout will now appear at the bottom of the Cutout Library item list.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Sketch-customconnector.png&amp;diff=224</id>
		<title>File:Sketch-customconnector.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Sketch-customconnector.png&amp;diff=224"/>
				<updated>2012-09-19T14:16:53Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_a_custom_cutout_for_a_connector&amp;diff=223</id>
		<title>Creating a custom cutout for a connector</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_a_custom_cutout_for_a_connector&amp;diff=223"/>
				<updated>2012-09-19T14:06:59Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Determine mounting specifications==&lt;br /&gt;
#Determine the mounting specifications (mounting hole and cutout dimensions) for the connector.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-customconnector.png|500px|thumb|center|Custom connector mounting specifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw Cutouts==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two methods to create a custom cutout in the Cutout Library.&lt;br /&gt;
*Method 1â€”Grouping objects and adding to library&lt;br /&gt;
*Method 2â€”Creating objects directly in Cutout Library&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Method 1: Grouping objects and adding to library====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click a face to edit. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Face Editor''' window, create the cutouts required to mount the connector (such as port and mounting screw cutouts). Use the '''Grid''' or '''Measure''' tool to accurately place each cutout.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-customcutout.png|500px|thumb|center|Several cutouts created to mount a connector]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects to include in your custom cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, click '''Group'''.  A bounding box will appear around the objects and additional commands will appear on the '''Properties''' panel for the group. The origin for the new group is based on the origin of the first object created in the group.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-customcutout-group.png|500px|thumb|center|Several cutouts selected and grouped]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, click '''Add to Library'''. A dialog box opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-addtolibrary.png|600px|thumb|center|Add To Library Dialog Box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#Leave the x and y offset values as-is. The x, y offset defines the position of the bounding box corner relative to the group origin. The width and height define the bounding box size.&lt;br /&gt;
#(Optional) Enter the Manufacturer, Part Number and/or Description.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''. Your custom cutout will now appear in the Cutout Library and '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Method 2: Creating objects in Cutout Editor====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click a face to edit. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library'''. The '''Cutout Library''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''New Item'''. A dialog box opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-cutoutlibrary-newitem.png|400px|thumb|center|New Item dialog box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the x and y offset values to position the bottom left corner of the bounding box relative to the origin. Entering an x value half of the width and a y value half of the height will place the origin in the centre of the bounding box.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the Width and Height of the bounding box for your cutout. All your cutouts should fit within this bounding box area.&lt;br /&gt;
#(Optional) Enter the Manufacturer, Part Number and/or Description.&lt;br /&gt;
#Create your cutouts using the Drawing tools. You can also include silkscreen text and images.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-cutouteditor-connector.png|500px|thumb|center|Creating a custom cutout in the Cutout Editor]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, click '''Accept &amp;amp; Close'''. [[File:button-acceptclose.png|40px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Your custom cutout will now appear at the bottom of the Cutout Library item list.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_a_custom_cutout_for_a_connector&amp;diff=222</id>
		<title>Creating a custom cutout for a connector</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_a_custom_cutout_for_a_connector&amp;diff=222"/>
				<updated>2012-09-19T14:04:49Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Drawing Cutouts==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two methods to create a custom cutout in the Cutout Library.&lt;br /&gt;
*Method 1â€”Grouping objects and adding to library&lt;br /&gt;
*Method 2â€”Creating objects directly in Cutout Library&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Method 1: Grouping objects and adding to library====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click a face to edit. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Face Editor''' window, create the cutouts required to mount the connector (such as port and mounting screw cutouts). Use the '''Grid''' or '''Measure''' tool to accurately place each cutout.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-customcutout.png|500px|thumb|center|Several cutouts created to mount a connector]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects to include in your custom cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, click '''Group'''.  A bounding box will appear around the objects and additional commands will appear on the '''Properties''' panel for the group. The origin for the new group is based on the origin of the first object created in the group.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-customcutout-group.png|500px|thumb|center|Several cutouts selected and grouped]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, click '''Add to Library'''. A dialog box opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-addtolibrary.png|600px|thumb|center|Add To Library Dialog Box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#Leave the x and y offset values as-is. The x, y offset defines the position of the bounding box corner relative to the group origin. The width and height define the bounding box size.&lt;br /&gt;
#(Optional) Enter the Manufacturer, Part Number and/or Description.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''. Your custom cutout will now appear in the Cutout Library and '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Method 2: Creating objects in Cutout Editor====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click a face to edit. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library'''. The '''Cutout Library''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''New Item'''. A dialog box opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-cutoutlibrary-newitem.png|400px|thumb|center|New Item dialog box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the x and y offset values to position the bottom left corner of the bounding box relative to the origin. Entering an x value half of the width and a y value half of the height will place the origin in the centre of the bounding box.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the Width and Height of the bounding box for your cutout. All your cutouts should fit within this bounding box area.&lt;br /&gt;
#(Optional) Enter the Manufacturer, Part Number and/or Description.&lt;br /&gt;
#Create your cutouts using the Drawing tools. You can also include silkscreen text and images.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-cutouteditor-connector.png|500px|thumb|center|Creating a custom cutout in the Cutout Editor]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, click '''Accept &amp;amp; Close'''. [[File:button-acceptclose.png|40px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Your custom cutout will now appear at the bottom of the Cutout Library item list.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Window-cutouteditor-connector.png&amp;diff=221</id>
		<title>File:Window-cutouteditor-connector.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Window-cutouteditor-connector.png&amp;diff=221"/>
				<updated>2012-09-19T13:53:03Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_a_custom_cutout_for_a_connector&amp;diff=219</id>
		<title>Creating a custom cutout for a connector</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_a_custom_cutout_for_a_connector&amp;diff=219"/>
				<updated>2012-09-18T15:00:02Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: Created page with &amp;quot;Method 1 #On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' bottom, then click a face to edit. The '''Face Editor''' window opens. #In the...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Method 1&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click a face to edit. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Face Editor''' window, create the cutouts required to mount the connector (such as port and mounting screw cutouts). Use the '''Grid''' or '''Measure''' tool to accurately place each cutout.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-customcutout.png|500px|thumb|center|Several cutouts created to mount a connector]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects to include in your custom cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, click '''Group'''.  A bounding box will appear around the objects and additional commands will appear on the '''Properties''' panel for the group. The origin for the new group is based on the origin of the first object created in the group.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-customcutout-group.png|500px|thumb|center|Several cutouts selected and grouped]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, click '''Add to Library'''. A dialog box opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-addtolibrary.png|600px|thumb|center|Add To Library Dialog Box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#Leave the x and y offset values as-is. The x, y offset defines the position of the bounding box corner relative to the group origin. The width and height define the bounding box size.&lt;br /&gt;
#(Optional) Enter the Manufacturer, Part Number and/or Description.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''. Your custom cutout will now appear in the Cutout Library and '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-customcutout.png&amp;diff=218</id>
		<title>File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-customcutout.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-customcutout.png&amp;diff=218"/>
				<updated>2012-09-18T14:51:21Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-customcutout-group.png&amp;diff=217</id>
		<title>File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-customcutout-group.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-customcutout-group.png&amp;diff=217"/>
				<updated>2012-09-18T14:51:07Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Tutorials&amp;diff=215</id>
		<title>Tutorials</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Tutorials&amp;diff=215"/>
				<updated>2012-09-18T14:45:19Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;====[[Creating an enclosure to mount a PCB]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial will guide you through the process of creating a custom rackmount enclosure to mount a mini-ITX PCB using self-clinching fasteners, and create cutouts for the PCB, power supply, and fan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial will explain how to select the height of self-clinching fasteners, such as standoffs and studs, for mounting components to your enclosures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Determining distance between objects]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial shows techniques for using the Measure tool to accurately place and move objects on a face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Creating a custom cutout for a connector]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial will guide you through creating a cutout to fit a custom connector and add it to the Cutout Library for future use.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Tutorials&amp;diff=214</id>
		<title>Tutorials</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Tutorials&amp;diff=214"/>
				<updated>2012-09-18T14:25:23Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;====[[Creating an enclosure to mount a PCB]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial will guide you through the process of creating a custom rackmount enclosure to mount a mini-ITX PCB using self-clinching fasteners, and create cutouts for the PCB, power supply, and fan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial will explain how to select the height of self-clinching fasteners, such as standoffs and studs, for mounting components to your enclosures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Determining distance between objects]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial shows techniques for using the Measure tool to accurately place and move objects on a face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Creating a cutout for a custom connector]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial will guide you through creating a cutout to fit a custom connector and add it to the Cutout Library for future use.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Tutorials&amp;diff=213</id>
		<title>Tutorials</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Tutorials&amp;diff=213"/>
				<updated>2012-09-18T14:24:48Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;====[[Creating an enclosure to mount a PCB]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial will guide you through the process of creating a custom rackmount enclosure to mount a mini-ITX PCB using self-clinching fasteners, and create cutouts for the PCB, power supply, and fan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial will explain how to select the height of self-clinching fasteners, such as standoffs and studs, for mounting components to your enclosures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Determining distance between objects]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial shows techniques for using the Measure tool to accurately place and move objects on a face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Creating a cutout for a custom connector]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial will guide you through creating a cutout to fit a custom connector and add it to the Cutout Library for future use.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=212</id>
		<title>Face Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=212"/>
				<updated>2012-09-11T20:35:11Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Face Editor Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The Face Editor allows you to customize the faces of your enclosure using standard editing tools for creating cutouts, silkscreens, exclusions zones, and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-labels.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Window]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;A. Standard Toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains common commands such as Cut Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo, as well as zoom and grid related commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;B. Drawing Toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains tools to draw shapes, add text, and add images to the face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;C. Viewport&lt;br /&gt;
:Working area that shows a 2D view of your enclosure face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;D. Status bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays the currently selected view, X- and Y coordinates of the pointer, side of face showing (outside or inside), and the name of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;E. Help pane&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays contextual help that changes based on the selected drawing tool.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;F. Properties pane&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays properties that can be changed for the selected object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the face=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Pan model==&lt;br /&gt;
To Pan the face, do one of the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 1'''&lt;br /&gt;
*In the viewport, click the wheel button and drag to pan the model to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 2'''&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard Toolbar''', click '''Pan'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the viewport, left-click and drag to pan the model to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 3'''&lt;br /&gt;
#Press and hold the '''Alt''' key.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the viewport, right-click and drag to pan the model to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zoom model==&lt;br /&gt;
To Zoom in or out, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 1'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Rotate the '''wheel button''' forward or backward.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 2'''&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard Toolbar''' (or on the '''View menu'''), click '''Zoom In''' or '''Zoom Out'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click within the viewport to incrementally zoom the model in or out.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 3'''&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard Toolbar''', click '''Zoom In'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag a diagonal selection within the viewport to zoom in to a desired area of the model.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The model moves toward the mouse pointer when zooming out and away from the mouse pointer when zooming in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reset view==&lt;br /&gt;
The Reset View command displays the face in the centre of the viewport at its original zoom level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 1'''&lt;br /&gt;
*On the '''Standard Toolbar''', click '''Reset View'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 2'''&lt;br /&gt;
*On the '''View''' menu, click '''Reset Zoom'''  to display the model in its original orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Coordinate System=&lt;br /&gt;
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|thumb|center|Face Editor Coordinate System]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Drawing shapes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Select the drawing mode==&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a drawing mode changes the type of objects created using the drawing tools as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Cutouts===&lt;br /&gt;
Cutout drawing mode allows you to draw shapes on your enclosure for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, etc. You can also draw custom shapes to create cutout logos and images.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Silkscreen===&lt;br /&gt;
Silkscreen drawing mode allows you to draw shapes, images, and text on your enclosure for labelling or adding logos and product identifier graphics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Exclusion===&lt;br /&gt;
Exclusion drawing mode allows you to add shapes to your enclosure to mark areas where other objects cannot be added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Construction===&lt;br /&gt;
Construction drawing mode allows you to draw shapes on your enclosure for use as reference when creating cutouts, silkscreen or exclusion zones, as well as when placing hardware.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', click the '''Mode''' button [[File:button-mode.png||40px|bottom]]. A pop-out window appears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:button-drawmode.png|40px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click a draw type to set the default drawing mode. The drawing tool icons will change color to reflect the default drawing mode.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw circles==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-circle.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-circle-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-circle-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-circle-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Circle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the centre of the circle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing circles and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw ellipses==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-ellipse.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-ellipse-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-ellipse-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-ellipse-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Ellipse''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the centre of the ellipse.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing ellipses and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw rectangles==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-rectangle.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-rectangle-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-rectangle-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-rectangle-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the corner of the rectangle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing rectangles and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw squares==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-rectangle.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-rectangle-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-rectangle-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-rectangle-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Method 1=====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Standard''' toolbar click '''Toggle Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid and automatically turn on snap to grid.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the corner of the rectangle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box, using the grid to restrict the bounding box to a square.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing squares or rectangles and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
=====Method 2=====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the corner of the rectangle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box. You will convert the rectangle to a square in the next step.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Properties''' pane, change the Width and Height to be equal.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing squares or rectangles and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw custom paths==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-path.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-path-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-path-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-path-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the Path tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place points of the path.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create an arc using the '''Path''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Start creating a path as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; Click '''arc''' on the '''Properties''' panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; Press the '''A''' key.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the end of the arc&lt;br /&gt;
#Move the pointer to change the size of the arc and click to place the arc.&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; Continue placing arcs.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; Click '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or press the '''A''' key to continue placing lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw lines==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-line.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-line-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-line-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-line-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Line''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to start the line.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the end of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing new lines and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add text==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Silkscreen [[File:tool-text.png|40px|bottom]] drawing mode only.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Selecting the Image Tool will switch the drawing mode to Silkscreen, regardless of the current drawing mode.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Text''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face and begin typing to insert a text block.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click in a other locations to add additional text blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue adding text blocks and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add images==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Silkscreen [[File:tool-image.png|40px|bottom]] drawing mode only.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Selecting the Image Tool will switch the drawing mode to Silkscreen, regardless of the current drawing mode.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Image tool'''. An Open dialog box appears.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select an image file, such as a custom logo, and click '''Open'''.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Measure distances==&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Measure''' tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Measure''' tool. [[File:tool-measure.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*Click Snap to force measurements from key points on objects (e.g. corners and centres)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Click Free to allow measurements from any point&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the start point.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the end point. The x, y, and total distances are displayed on the '''Properties''' panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue measuring distances and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-measure.png|600px|thumb|centre|Measuring distance between objects]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Grid==&lt;br /&gt;
The grid is useful to help accurately place and align objects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turn on/off the Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Toggle Grid. [[File:button-togglegrid.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click Toggle Grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of the grid.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Snap to Grid option is automatically enabled when the grid is turned on.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-grid.png|600px|thumb|centre|Grid on with 2 in width and height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turn on/off Snap to Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Snap to Grid [[File:button-snapgrid.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click Snap to Grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of Snap to Grid.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Change Grid Size and Offset===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Grid Size [[File:button-gridsize.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click Grid Size.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-faceeditor-gridsize.png|thumb|centre|Grid Size Dialog Box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Grid Size dialog box, change any of the following values:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Width'''â€”horizontal distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Height'''â€”vertical distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Offset Width'''â€”horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Offset Height'''â€”vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Grid Opacity'''â€”opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Save as Default Grid Size'''â€”use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check Save as Default Grid Size, the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor Window, even if you re-open the same face.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-gridoffset.png|600px|thumb|centre|Grid with 2 in width and height, 1 in Offset Width and Offset Height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Changing object properties==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-circle-silkscreen.png|thumb|Properties Pane for circle silkscreen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-text-silkscreen.png|thumb|Properties Pane for text silkscreen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fill===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to silkscreen and construction objects including circles, ellipses, rectangles, and paths.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Line Thickness===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to silkscreen and construction objects including circles, ellipses, rectangles, paths, and lines.''&lt;br /&gt;
''Also applies to lines of all object types.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to silkscreen objects including circles, ellipses, rectangles, paths, lines, and text.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a color from the '''Color''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
* Refer to [http://www.protocase.com/products/mcf_silkscreen.php Stocked Silkscreening Colors] for a list of available colours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Type===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to all objects.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* Object types include:&lt;br /&gt;
:Cutout&lt;br /&gt;
:Silkscreen&lt;br /&gt;
:Exclusion&lt;br /&gt;
:Construction&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Origin===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to all objects.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the location of the X and Y origins with respect to the absolute coordinate system.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.&lt;br /&gt;
* [image]&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Circles'''â€”centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Ellipses'''â€”centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Rectangles'''â€”corner closes to the absolute origin&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Text'''â€”bottom left corner&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Paths'''â€”start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Lines'''â€”start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Images'''â€”bottom left corner&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Size===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to all objects (options displayed depend on object selected).''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* All values use the default Display Units, unless otherwise specified.  See Preferences [add link] to change the default Display Units.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Circles'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Radius, Diameter'''â€”Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Ellipses'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusX'''â€”Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusY'''â€”Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).&lt;br /&gt;
'''Rectangles'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height'''â€”Width and Height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation'''â€”Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
'''Text'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation'''â€”Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font'''â€”Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, or Bookman.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Size'''â€”Change the font size within the available range of 7â€“99.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Style'''â€”Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Text'''â€”Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Path'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation'''â€”Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
'''Lines'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Length'''â€”Distance from origin to end point.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Images'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height'''â€”Width and height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation'''â€”Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding built-in cutouts=&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase DesignerÂ® also offers a variety of built-in cutouts that you can add to your enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To quickly place an existing item from the cutout library:&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]] and click a face to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, point to a category and then click an item.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-DB9menu.png|600px|thumb|centre]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the built-in cutout.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-db9.png|600px|thumb|centre]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|You can also open the Cutout Library window to perform more tasks such as creating or editing cutouts. On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library'''. See [[Cutout Library]] for further information.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding custom cutouts=&lt;br /&gt;
You can add custom cutouts from the Cutout Library using the same method as adding built-in cutouts. See [[#Adding_built-in_cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*The '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu contains all the items in the Cutout Library.&lt;br /&gt;
*See [[Cutout Library]] for details on creating custom cutouts in the Cutout Library window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding hardware=&lt;br /&gt;
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners to mount a PCB or handles. Protocase uses common PEMÂ® brand self-clinching fasteners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add self-clinching fasteners==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]] and click a face to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Toggle Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid and automatically turn on snap to grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#From the Cutout Library, select the type of Self Clinching Fastener and its options.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-pem.png|centre|Self-Clinching Fasteners Dialog Box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Place PEM''' and click the face to add the fasteners.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue adding fasteners and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-pem.png|600px|thumb|centre|Placing Self-Clinching Fasteners]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-main-pem.png|600px|thumb|centre|Self-Clinching Fasteners on bottom face (cover hidden)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add mounting hardware==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]] and click a face to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Toggle Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid and automatically turn on snap to grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, point to Hardware, then click a hardware item.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue adding mounting hardware and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-handles.png|600px|thumb|centre|Placing handles]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-main-ushape-handles.png|600px|thumb|centre|U-Shape enclosure with handles]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Manipulating objects=&lt;br /&gt;
==Select object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select multiple objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#** click the first object, press and hold the Shift key, then click other objects;&lt;br /&gt;
#**or click and drag a selection box over several objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-selection.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”selecting multiple objects by dragging a selection box]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Move object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To move a single object:{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move several objects:{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Align and distribute objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Select 2 or more objects. The Alignment and Distribute commands appear on the '''Properties''' panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, click an alignment or distribute command.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alignment'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Notes:'''''&lt;br /&gt;
*Objects align to first object selected&lt;br /&gt;
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-align.png|600px|thumb|centre|Objects with bottoms aligned and centers distributed evenly]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Distribute'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cut, Copy, and Paste objects==&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands to easily create multiple copies of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Select one or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Edit''' menu, select '''Cut''', '''Copy''', or '''Paste'''. A copy of the object(s) will appear next to the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the object(s) on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Undo and Redo actions==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Edit''' menu, select '''Undo''' or '''Redo'''.}}{{Note|You can Undo or Redo multiple times by repeatably selecting Undo or Redo.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Exporting a Face and Silkscreen Templates=&lt;br /&gt;
==Export Face==&lt;br /&gt;
You can export an image file (png format) of a face for use in presentations or to review the design.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Silkscreen''' menu, click '''Export Face to Bitmap for Presentation'''. A Save dialog box opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type a name for the image file and click '''Save'''.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Export/Import Silkscreen Template==&lt;br /&gt;
You can export an image file (png format) of a face to create a silkscreen template for editing in a 3rd party image program and importing back onto a face as a silkscreen image.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Silkscreen''' menu, click '''Export Silkscreen Template'''. A Save dialog box opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type a name for the image file and click '''Save'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the image file in an image editing program and design your silkscreen images.&lt;br /&gt;
#Save the image file (png format) in the image editing program.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Silkscreen''' menu, click '''Import Silkscreen Template'''. The image will be imported and placed on the face as a silkscreen image.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Face Editor Preferences=&lt;br /&gt;
You can change several parameters for controlling the Face Editor functionality.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:dialogbox-preferences.png|400px|thumb|centre|Preferences dialog box]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Edit''' Menu, click '''Preferences'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Preferences''' dialog box, change any of the following values:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Display Units'''â€”used for drawing/editing objects and measuring distances. On the '''Display Units''' menu, click '''INCHES''' or '''MM'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Grid Size X, Grid Size Y'''â€”the horizontal and vertical space between grid lines. Type a number or click the up/down arrows to change the value in 0.1 increments.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Precision Digits'''â€”the number of units displayed when drawing/editing objects and measuring distances. Type a number or click the up/down arrows to change the value in 0.1 increments.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Grid Opacity'''â€”opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Allow Free Editing'''â€”Enable or disable the ability to move or change the size of objects directly on the face. Clear the check box to prevent accidentally moving or changing the size of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Prompt for Whether to Reject Bad Moves'''â€”Displays a warning if you move an object outside a face boundary or overlapping an exclusion zone. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Reject Bad Moves'''â€”Prevents you from moving an object outside a face boundary or overlapping an exclusion zone. The object is automatically moved back to its original position.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Never Show Whatâ€™s New'''â€”Disables a dialog box at startup showing the new features of Protocase DesignerÂ®.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Show Whatâ€™s New for this version'''â€”Displays a dialog box at startup showing the new features for the current version of Protocase DesignerÂ®.}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Diagram-coordinates.png&amp;diff=211</id>
		<title>File:Diagram-coordinates.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Diagram-coordinates.png&amp;diff=211"/>
				<updated>2012-09-11T20:33:25Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_an_enclosure_to_mount_a_PCB&amp;diff=210</id>
		<title>Creating an enclosure to mount a PCB</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Creating_an_enclosure_to_mount_a_PCB&amp;diff=210"/>
				<updated>2012-09-11T17:11:36Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: /* Add cutouts to chassis */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;One of the most common uses for Protocase Designer is to design a custom enclosure to mount a PCB and associated components.&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial will guide you through the process of creating a custom rackmount enclosure to mount a mini-ITX PCB using self-clinching fasteners, and create cutouts for the PCB, power supply, and fan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Select components to mount in enclosure==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Source the components you want to mount in your enclosure&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:photo-mini-ITXPCB.png|250px|center|thumb|Mini-ITX PCB]][[File:photo-fan-60mm.png|100px|center|thumb|60mm Fan]][[File:photo-powersupply.png|200px|center|thumb|Power Supply]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Determine the mounting specifications (i.e. mounting hole and cutout dimensions and locations).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-powersupply-pcb.jpg|600px|thumb|center|Top viewâ€”Sketch of power supply and PCB mounting dimensions]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-powersupply-pcb-rear.jpg|600px|thumb|center|Rear viewâ€”Sketch of power supply and PCB mounting dimensions]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}{{Note|Mounting dimensions are not needed for the 60mm fan since a built-in cutout for the fan will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
}}{{Note|It is important to properly understand how to mount each component including any required clearances.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Sketch mounting locations for components==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Determine mounting location for all components&lt;br /&gt;
#Determine cutout, mounting hole, and self-clinching fastener sizes to mount all components&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a sketch of all required mounting dimensions.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-mounting-dimensions.jpg|600px|thumb|center|Top viewâ€”Sketch of power supply and PCB mounting dimensions]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:sketch-mounting-dimensions-rear.jpg|600px|thumb|center|Rear viewâ€”Sketch of power supply and PCB mounting dimensions]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}{{Note|Dimensions are always measured from the absolute origin on the OUTSIDE of the enclosure (i.e. you must factor in the thickness of the enclosure)}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Create enclosure from template==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following&lt;br /&gt;
#*Open Protocase DesignerÂ® and click '''New File'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#*If Protocase DesignerÂ® is already open, on the '''File''' menu, click '''New'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Rackmount Enclosures''', then click '''Rackmount'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-newassembly-rackmount-color.png|500px|thumb|centre|New Assembly window]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a '''Depth''' of 15 (inches) and '''Height''' of 2 (U).&lt;br /&gt;
#Select a color for each panel, as desired and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select 14 (.075) for all thicknesses.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''View''' menu, click '''Show/Hide Parts'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-showhideparts-rackmount.png|300px|thumb|centre|Show/Hide Parts dialog box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to clear the '''Cover''' check box. This will hide the cover allowing you to view the inside of the enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-main-rackmount-nocover.png|400px|thumb|centre|Main windowâ€”rackmount enclosure with cover hidden]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add PCB and power supply cutouts to rear panel==&lt;br /&gt;
This enclosure requires two rectangular cutouts on the rear panel to accommodate the mini-ITX PCB and power supply.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click the rear face. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor windowâ€”rackmount rear face]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Rectangle''' tool. [[File:tool-rectangle.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Draw two rectangles at approximate mounting locations.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear-rectangles.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”rectangle cutouts on rackmount rear face]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Circle''' tool. [[File:tool-circle.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Draw two circles on each side of the right rectangle.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear-circles.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”circle cutouts on rackmount rear face]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select each cutout and update the origin, width, and height as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
#*PCB rectangle cutout (on left)&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 10&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 0.375&lt;br /&gt;
#:Width: 6.25&lt;br /&gt;
#:Height: 1.75&lt;br /&gt;
#*Power Supply rectangle cutout (on right)&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 1.5&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 0.4&lt;br /&gt;
#:Width: 3.2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Height: 1.6&lt;br /&gt;
#*Power Supply circle cutout 1&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 4.85&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 1.2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Diameter: 0.125&lt;br /&gt;
#*Power Supply circle cutout 2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 1.35&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 1.2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Diameter: 0.125&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear-circle-origin.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”updating circle origin]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add built-in fan cutout to rear panel==&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase DesignerÂ® offers a library of cutouts for common components including fans of various sizes.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, point to '''Fans''', '''General''', then click '''60mm'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the fan cutout at the approximate mounting location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear-fan-placing.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor windowâ€”placing fan cutout]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the fan cutout and update the origin as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
#*Fan cutout&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 7.5&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 1.5&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-rear-fan-origin.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor windowâ€”rack mount with rectangle cutouts and fan cutout]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, click '''Accept &amp;amp; Close'''. [[File:button-acceptclose.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add cutouts to chassis==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]], then click the chassis (bottom) of the enclosure. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Inside''' [[File:button-inside.png|60px|middle]] to change the view to the inside of the chassis.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-pem-studs-440-500.png|300px|thumb|center|Self Clinching Fastener dialog boxâ€”selecting studs, 4-40 x .500&amp;quot; long]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select Studs, 4-40 x .500 long and click '''Place PEM'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place two studs at the approximate mounting location for the power supply.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-chassis-studs.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”placing studs, 4-40 x .500&amp;quot; long]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-pem-standoffs-440-375.png|300px|thumb|center|Self Clinching Fastener dialog boxâ€”selecting standoffs, 4-40 x .375&amp;quot; long]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select Standoffs, 4-40 x .375&amp;quot; long and click '''Place PEM'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place four standoffs at the approximate mounting location for the PCB (on the right).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-chassis-standoffs.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor windowâ€”placing standoffs, 4-40 x .375&amp;quot; long]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool.  [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select each standoff and stud and update their origins as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
#*Stud 1&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 1.15&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 6.675&lt;br /&gt;
#*Stud 2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 4.65&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 6.675&lt;br /&gt;
#*Standoff 1&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 9.4&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 14&lt;br /&gt;
#*Standoff 2&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 15.65&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 14&lt;br /&gt;
#*Standoff 3&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 9.4&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 8&lt;br /&gt;
#*Standoff 4&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(X): 15.65&lt;br /&gt;
#:Origin(Y): 8&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-rackmount-chassis-pems-origin.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”studs and standoffs placed in proper locations]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing toolbar''', click '''Accept &amp;amp; Close'''. [[File:button-acceptclose.png|40px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-main-rackmount-pems.png|600px|thumb|center|Main windowâ€”rack mount with studs and standoffs added]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
You can now customize your enclosure further by adding additional cutouts, silkscreen, and hardware to the other faces and then request an instant quote.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=209</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=209"/>
				<updated>2012-09-11T16:28:24Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: /* Quick Start */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{DISPLAYTITLE:&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;display:none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
='''Protocase DesignerÂ® Documentation'''=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#5E7DD1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''The fastest and easiest way to design, price and build custom electronics enclosures.'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;===&lt;br /&gt;
*Free Downloadable 3D Enclosure Design Software&lt;br /&gt;
*Fast and Easy Design&lt;br /&gt;
*Instant Price Quotes&lt;br /&gt;
*Buy Your Custom Enclosure Online With 2 - 3 Day Turnaround&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:protocase-wiki-banner.png|650px|centre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;45%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Introduction]]====&lt;br /&gt;
A general overview of why Protocase DesignerÂ® will save you time and money when designing custom electronic enclosures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Feature Overview]]====&lt;br /&gt;
An overview of the main features of Protocase DesignerÂ®.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[http://www.protocasedesigner.com/download.php Download]====&lt;br /&gt;
Download the latest Protocase DesignerÂ® software for free from the Protocase Designer website. Windows, Linux, and Mac OS X version are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[FAQ]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Frequently asked questions on using Protocase DesignerÂ® and ordering your custom electronic enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[http://forum.protocase.com/ Forum]====&lt;br /&gt;
A support forum for Protocase DesignerÂ® users to ask questions, share experiences, report bugs, and check enhancements. Protocase DesignerÂ® developers monitor and participate in the forum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Release Notes]]====&lt;br /&gt;
List of new features and bug fixes in each version of Protocase DesignerÂ®.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Help:Contents| Wiki Editing Help]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Help resources for viewing and editing the Protocase Designer Documentation wiki including wiki formatting, common terms, and editing guidelines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;10%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;45%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==User Guide==&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Quick Start]]====&lt;br /&gt;
A quick introduction to using Protocase Designer to create, customize, and order your custom electronic enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Tutorials]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Step-by-step tutorials showing how to design custom enclosures for common applications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Main Window]]====&lt;br /&gt;
The main interface for viewing the 3D model of your enclosure including creating, opening, and saving files, as well as selecting a face to edit in the Face Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Face Editor|Face Editor Window]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Using the Face Editor to add shapes for cutouts, silkscreens, exclusions, and construction lines as well as silkscreen text and images.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Cutout Library]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Adding custom cutouts, standard fasteners, and mounting hardware from the Cutout Library.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Instant Quotes and Purchasing]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Registering, requesting instant quotes, and purchasing your custom electronic enclosure.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure.png&amp;diff=207</id>
		<title>File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure.png&amp;diff=207"/>
				<updated>2012-07-17T18:32:18Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure-moved.png&amp;diff=206</id>
		<title>File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure-moved.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure-moved.png&amp;diff=206"/>
				<updated>2012-07-17T18:32:06Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-front-cutouts.png&amp;diff=205</id>
		<title>File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-front-cutouts.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-front-cutouts.png&amp;diff=205"/>
				<updated>2012-07-17T18:31:54Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Tutorials&amp;diff=204</id>
		<title>Tutorials</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Tutorials&amp;diff=204"/>
				<updated>2012-07-17T18:22:12Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;====[[Creating an enclosure to mount a PCB]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial will guide you through the process of creating a custom rackmount enclosure to mount a mini-ITX PCB using self-clinching fasteners, and create cutouts for the PCB, power supply, and fan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial will explain how to select the height of self-clinching fasteners, such as standoffs and studs, for mounting components to your enclosures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Determining distance between objects]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial shows techniques for using the Measure tool to accurately place and move objects on a face.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=3D_View_Window&amp;diff=203</id>
		<title>3D View Window</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=3D_View_Window&amp;diff=203"/>
				<updated>2012-07-17T12:06:00Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: /* Add/Delete notes */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Main Window overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The main window displays a 3D model of your enclosure which you can manipulate in real time.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-main-labels.png|600px|thumb|centre|Main Windowâ€”U-Shape enclosure rotate to show rear face]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: '''Aâ€”Standard Toolbar'''&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Bâ€”Viewport'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=Creating, opening, saving assembly files=&lt;br /&gt;
Enclosures created in Protocase DesignerÂ® are saved as Protocase DesignerÂ® Assembly files (.pda file extension).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Create new assembly file==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; On the '''File''' menu, click '''New'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; On the '''Standard Toolbar''', click '''New'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Note: If the current assembly is not saved, you will be prompted to save.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select an enclosure category on the left and then select an enclosure type.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-newassembly-noselection.png|400px|thumb|centre|New Assembly Window]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Modify the enclosure parameters including size, thickness, material, and colour to meet your design requirements.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-newassembly-ushape.png|400px|thumb|centre|New Assembly Window]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click OK to view a 3D model which you can manipulate in the main window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-main-ushape.png|600px|thumb|centre|New U-Shape Enclosure]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Open existing assembly file==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; On the '''File''' menu, click '''Open'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; On the '''Standard Toolbar''', click '''Open'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select a previously saved Protocase DesignerÂ® Assembly File to open.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Save current assembly file==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; On the '''File''' menu, click '''Save'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; On the '''Standard Toolbar''', click '''Save'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#If this is the first time the assembly is being saved, the Save dialog box will open. Select a location to save the assembly file and type a name for the assembly, then click '''Save'''.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Save a copy of the current assembly file==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; On the '''File''' menu, click '''Save As'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; On the '''Standard Toolbar''', click '''Save As'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Save dialog box, select a location to save the assembly file and type a new name for the assembly, then click '''Save'''.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=Changing enclosure properties=&lt;br /&gt;
At any point after you create a new enclosure you can modify your enclosure properties such as size, thickness, material, and colour.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Edit''' menu, click '''Edit Enclosure Properties'''. The Edit Properties dialog box appears.&lt;br /&gt;
#Change any of the enclosure properties.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-editproperties.png|500px|center|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}{{Note|The size of your enclosure must meet all the manufacturing constraints listed at the bottom of the dialog box.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the model=&lt;br /&gt;
There are several controls to allow viewing and manipulating the 3D model of your enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Rotate model==&lt;br /&gt;
The Rotate command enables spinning the model about its center.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Standard Toolbar, click '''Rotate'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the viewport, left-click and drag to rotate the model to the desired orientation.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Pan model==&lt;br /&gt;
The Pan command enables moving the model about the plane of the viewport.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
To pan the model, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 1'''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#In the viewport, right-click and drag the model to the desired location.}}&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 2'''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Press and hold the Alt key&lt;br /&gt;
#In the viewport, left-click and drag the model to the desired location.}}&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 3'''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Standard Toolbar, click Pan.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the viewport, left-click and drag to Pan the model to the desired location.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zoom model==&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom command controls the visual size of the model displayed within the viewport.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#In the main window, rotate the wheel button forward or backward to zoom in or out.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|The model zooms in/out from the centre of the viewport, regardless of the pointer location.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Show/Hide Parts==&lt;br /&gt;
The Show/Hide Parts command allows for viewing inside the model by hiding one or more parts.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''View''' menu, click '''Show/Hide Parts'''. The Show/Hide Parts dialog box appears.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select or clear the appropriate check boxes to show or hide parts.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toggle flat/bent view==&lt;br /&gt;
The Toggle Flat and Bent commands displays the enclosure parts as they are laid out prior to the bending process during manufacturing.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: This feature is for reference only and does not affect the manufacturing of the final enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#* On the Standard Toolbar, click Flat to display the model in a flat configuration or click Bent to display the model in the default bent configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
#* On the View Menu, click Toggle Flat to change a model between a bent configuration or a flat configuration.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reset view==&lt;br /&gt;
The Reset View command displays the model in the center of the viewport in its original orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the '''Standard Toolbar''', click '''Reset View'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the '''View''' menu, click '''Reset View'''.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Use Transparency==&lt;br /&gt;
The transparency option makes exclusion zones and the background of silkscreen images transparent. This allows you to view features that may be hidden behind exclusion zones or silkscreen images.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Edit''' menu, click '''Preferences''' to display the preferences dialog box.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the '''Use Transparency''' check box.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Turning on the transparency option does not affect the final product.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Change background color==&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Change background color''' command allows for customizing the background color of the viewport.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Edit''' menu, click '''Preferences''' to display the preferences dialog box.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Change Background Color'''. A dialog box appears allowing you to customize the background color of the viewport.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the Swatches, HSB, RGB}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Change axis color==&lt;br /&gt;
The Change Axis Color command allows for customizing the color of the coordinate system axis displayed on the model.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Edit''' menu, click '''Preferences''' to display the preferences dialog box.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Change Axis Color'''. A dialog box appears allowing you to customize the axis colour.}}&lt;br /&gt;
=Editing a face using the Face Editor=&lt;br /&gt;
To customize your enclosure, you add features such as cutouts, silkscreen, exclusion zones, and construction lines to a face in the Face Editor Window.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To open the Face Editor:&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Rotate the model to show the face you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard Toolbar''', click the Edit Face button. [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]]. The pointer will change to a crosshair.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click a face to edit. The Face Editor window opens.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Face Editor|Face Editor Window]] for details on using the Face Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the Part Tree=&lt;br /&gt;
The Part Tree shows a hierarchical list of all the faces and objects in your enclosure. You can change the name and description of objects as well as open a face in the Face Editor Window directly from the Part Tree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-parttree-ushape-note.png|600px|thumb|centre|Part Tree windowâ€“adding notes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Navigate the Part Tree==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the icon to the left of a face to display the objects on that face below.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name to display description, and notes on the right of the Part Tree window.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Change object name and description==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type a new name or description on the right.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add/Delete notes==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add notes to parts, faces, and objects for your own reference or to provide additional information to technical support&lt;br /&gt;
such as &amp;quot;Please scrub this with a scouring pad&amp;quot;. You can also use it to place features that might not be permitted in Protocase DesignerÂ® but can be manufactured with certain restrictions. For example, you could create a circle using construction lines near the edge of a face on the exclusion zone (where you wouldn't normally be able to place a self-clinching standoff) and add a note &amp;quot;Add 6-32 x 3/8&amp;quot; standoff here&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*If there are no notes, type a note in the notes field.&lt;br /&gt;
#*If there are existing notes, click '''New Note''' and type a note in the notes field.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the arrows to view each note.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Delete Note''' to delete the currently displayed note.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing a face from the Part Tree==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Click a face name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Edit Face'''. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-parttree-ushape-editface.png|600px|thumb|centre|Part Tree windowâ€”editing a face]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|The Part Tree window can also be accessed from the Face Editor Window.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Main Window Preferences=&lt;br /&gt;
You can change the background color and the axis color in the main window viewport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Face_Editor#Face_Editor_Preferences|Face Editor Preferences]] for changing the background color and axis color. The same Preferences dialog box is accessed from the Main window or Face Editor Window.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Instant_Quotes_and_Purchasing&amp;diff=202</id>
		<title>Instant Quotes and Purchasing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Instant_Quotes_and_Purchasing&amp;diff=202"/>
				<updated>2012-07-12T19:37:49Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: /* Create Requisition for purchasing department */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Registering==&lt;br /&gt;
Registering allows you to request instant quotes, request purchase orders, order your enclosure online, as well as access the Protocase DesignerÂ® forums.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''File''' menu, click '''Register'''. The '''Registration''' dialog box appears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-registration.png|500px|thumb|center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter your contact information and create a password, then click '''OK'''. A message appears confirming that registration was successful. You will receive an email within a few minutes containing verification link. If you do not receive the verification email within a few minutes, check your spam folder.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the verification link in the email to complete the verification process.&lt;br /&gt;
}}{{Note|If you have trouble registering, please email [mailto:info@protocase.com info@protocase.com]}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Request Instant Quote==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Instant Quotes and Purchasing''' menu, click '''Instant Quote'''. A new webpage will open.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-quote.png|600px|thumb|center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the quantity required and click '''Update'''.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Using the '''Instant Quotes and Purchasing''' option only sends information required for quoting purposes which does NOT include your enclosure model. You must use the '''Create Requisition for purchasing department''' or '''Order your enclosure''' options in order to submit all required information to order your enclosure.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Create Requisition for purchasing department==&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a requisition for your purchasing department will generate a quote similar to the instant quote option and will automatically send you an email with all the details that your purchasing department requires to order your enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Instant Quotes and Purchasing''' menu, click '''Create Requisition for my Purchasing Department'''. A new webpage will open.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-requisition.png|600px|thumb|center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the quantity required and click '''Update'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Email this page'''. An email including all the details for purchasing is sent to the email address entered during registration.  If you do not receive the email within a few minutes, check your spam folder.&lt;br /&gt;
#Forward this email to your supervisor and purchasing department for approval.&lt;br /&gt;
#[http://www.protocase.com/order/index.php Contact] Protocase by phone, email or fax to place your order.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Order your enclosure==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Instant Quotes and Purchasing''' menu, click '''Purchase'''. A new webpage will open.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-purchase1-generatequote.png|600px|thumb|center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the quantity required and click '''Generate Quote'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Review your quote and click '''Continue'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-purchase1-quote.png|600px|thumb|center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Confirm your contact information and click '''Continue'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-purchase2-basicinfo.png|600px|thumb|center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter your billing details including payment method and click '''Continue'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-purchase3-billing.png|600px|thumb|center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter your shipping details. If your shipping details are the same as your billing details, select the check box and click '''Continue'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-purchase4-shipping.png|600px|thumb|center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Review all your order details as well as the terms and conditions of sale.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the check box to agree with the terms.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Submit Order''' to complete the ordering process. An order summary appears and an order confirmation email is sent to the email address entered during registration. If you do not receive the email within a few minutes, check your spam folder.&lt;br /&gt;
}}{{Note|If you have trouble ordering your enclosure, please email [mailto:info@protocase.com info@protocase.com]}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Template:Note&amp;diff=201</id>
		<title>Template:Note</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Template:Note&amp;diff=201"/>
				<updated>2012-07-12T18:41:57Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This template an indented Note in italics procedure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|This is a note.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Results in'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|This is a note.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''''Note:''' {{{1}}}''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Instant_Quotes_and_Purchasing&amp;diff=200</id>
		<title>Instant Quotes and Purchasing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Instant_Quotes_and_Purchasing&amp;diff=200"/>
				<updated>2012-07-12T18:41:39Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: /* Request Instant Quote */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Registering==&lt;br /&gt;
Registering allows you to request instant quotes, request purchase orders, order your enclosure online, as well as access the Protocase DesignerÂ® forums.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''File''' menu, click '''Register'''. The '''Registration''' dialog box appears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-registration.png|500px|thumb|center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter your contact information and create a password, then click '''OK'''. A message appears confirming that registration was successful. You will receive an email within a few minutes containing verification link. If you do not receive the verification email within a few minutes, check your spam folder.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the verification link in the email to complete the verification process.&lt;br /&gt;
}}{{Note|If you have trouble registering, please email [mailto:info@protocase.com info@protocase.com]}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Request Instant Quote==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Instant Quotes and Purchasing''' menu, click '''Instant Quote'''. A new webpage will open.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-quote.png|600px|thumb|center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the quantity required and click '''Update'''.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Using the '''Instant Quotes and Purchasing''' option only sends information required for quoting purposes which does NOT include your enclosure model. You must use the '''Create Requisition for purchasing department''' or '''Order your enclosure''' options in order to submit all required information to order your enclosure.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Create Requisition for purchasing department==&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a requisition for your purchasing department will generate a quote similar to the instant quote option and will automatically send you an email with all the details that your purchasing department requires to order your enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Instant Quotes and Purchasing''' menu, click '''Create Requisition for my Purchasing Department'''. A new webpage will open.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-requisition.png|600px|thumb|center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the quantity required and click '''Update'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Email this page'''. An email including all the details for purchasing is sent to the email address entered during registration.  If you do not receive the email within a few minutes, check your spam folder.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Order your enclosure==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Instant Quotes and Purchasing''' menu, click '''Purchase'''. A new webpage will open.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-purchase1-generatequote.png|600px|thumb|center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the quantity required and click '''Generate Quote'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Review your quote and click '''Continue'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-purchase1-quote.png|600px|thumb|center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Confirm your contact information and click '''Continue'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-purchase2-basicinfo.png|600px|thumb|center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter your billing details including payment method and click '''Continue'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-purchase3-billing.png|600px|thumb|center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter your shipping details. If your shipping details are the same as your billing details, select the check box and click '''Continue'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-purchase4-shipping.png|600px|thumb|center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Review all your order details as well as the terms and conditions of sale.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the check box to agree with the terms.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Submit Order''' to complete the ordering process. An order summary appears and an order confirmation email is sent to the email address entered during registration. If you do not receive the email within a few minutes, check your spam folder.&lt;br /&gt;
}}{{Note|If you have trouble ordering your enclosure, please email [mailto:info@protocase.com info@protocase.com]}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=199</id>
		<title>Face Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=199"/>
				<updated>2012-07-12T18:36:20Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: /* Changing object properties */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Face Editor Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The Face Editor allows you to customize the faces of your enclosure using standard editing tools for creating cutouts, silkscreens, exclusions zones, and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-labels.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Window]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;A. Standard Toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains common commands such as Cut Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo, as well as zoom and grid related commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;B. Drawing Toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains tools to draw shapes, add text, and add images to the face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;C. Viewport&lt;br /&gt;
:Working area that shows a 2D view of your enclosure face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;D. Status bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays the currently selected view, X- and Y coordinates of the pointer, side of face showing (outside or inside), and the name of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;E. Help pane&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays contextual help that changes based on the selected drawing tool.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;F. Properties pane&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays properties that can be changed for the selected object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the face=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Pan model==&lt;br /&gt;
To Pan the face, do one of the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 1'''&lt;br /&gt;
*In the viewport, click the wheel button and drag to pan the model to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 2'''&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard Toolbar''', click '''Pan'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the viewport, left-click and drag to pan the model to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 3'''&lt;br /&gt;
#Press and hold the '''Alt''' key.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the viewport, right-click and drag to pan the model to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zoom model==&lt;br /&gt;
To Zoom in or out, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 1'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Rotate the '''wheel button''' forward or backward.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 2'''&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard Toolbar''' (or on the '''View menu'''), click '''Zoom In''' or '''Zoom Out'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click within the viewport to incrementally zoom the model in or out.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 3'''&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard Toolbar''', click '''Zoom In'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag a diagonal selection within the viewport to zoom in to a desired area of the model.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The model moves toward the mouse pointer when zooming out and away from the mouse pointer when zooming in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reset view==&lt;br /&gt;
The Reset View command displays the face in the centre of the viewport at its original zoom level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 1'''&lt;br /&gt;
*On the '''Standard Toolbar''', click '''Reset View'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 2'''&lt;br /&gt;
*On the '''View''' menu, click '''Reset Zoom'''  to display the model in its original orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Drawing shapes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Select the drawing mode==&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a drawing mode changes the type of objects created using the drawing tools as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Cutouts===&lt;br /&gt;
Cutout drawing mode allows you to draw shapes on your enclosure for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, etc. You can also draw custom shapes to create cutout logos and images.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Silkscreen===&lt;br /&gt;
Silkscreen drawing mode allows you to draw shapes, images, and text on your enclosure for labelling or adding logos and product identifier graphics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Exclusion===&lt;br /&gt;
Exclusion drawing mode allows you to add shapes to your enclosure to mark areas where other objects cannot be added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Construction===&lt;br /&gt;
Construction drawing mode allows you to draw shapes on your enclosure for use as reference when creating cutouts, silkscreen or exclusion zones, as well as when placing hardware.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', click the '''Mode''' button [[File:button-mode.png||40px|bottom]]. A pop-out window appears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:button-drawmode.png|40px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click a draw type to set the default drawing mode. The drawing tool icons will change color to reflect the default drawing mode.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw circles==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-circle.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-circle-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-circle-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-circle-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Circle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the centre of the circle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing circles and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw ellipses==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-ellipse.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-ellipse-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-ellipse-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-ellipse-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Ellipse''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the centre of the ellipse.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing ellipses and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw rectangles==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-rectangle.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-rectangle-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-rectangle-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-rectangle-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the corner of the rectangle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing rectangles and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw squares==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-rectangle.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-rectangle-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-rectangle-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-rectangle-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Method 1=====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Standard''' toolbar click '''Toggle Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid and automatically turn on snap to grid.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the corner of the rectangle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box, using the grid to restrict the bounding box to a square.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing squares or rectangles and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
=====Method 2=====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the corner of the rectangle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box. You will convert the rectangle to a square in the next step.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Properties''' pane, change the Width and Height to be equal.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing squares or rectangles and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw custom paths==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-path.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-path-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-path-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-path-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the Path tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place points of the path.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create an arc using the '''Path''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Start creating a path as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; Click '''arc''' on the '''Properties''' panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; Press the '''A''' key.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the end of the arc&lt;br /&gt;
#Move the pointer to change the size of the arc and click to place the arc.&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; Continue placing arcs.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; Click '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or press the '''A''' key to continue placing lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw lines==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-line.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-line-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-line-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-line-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Line''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to start the line.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the end of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing new lines and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add text==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Silkscreen [[File:tool-text.png|40px|bottom]] drawing mode only.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Selecting the Image Tool will switch the drawing mode to Silkscreen, regardless of the current drawing mode.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Text''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face and begin typing to insert a text block.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click in a other locations to add additional text blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue adding text blocks and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add images==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Silkscreen [[File:tool-image.png|40px|bottom]] drawing mode only.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Selecting the Image Tool will switch the drawing mode to Silkscreen, regardless of the current drawing mode.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Image tool'''. An Open dialog box appears.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select an image file, such as a custom logo, and click '''Open'''.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Measure distances==&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Measure''' tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Measure''' tool. [[File:tool-measure.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*Click Snap to force measurements from key points on objects (e.g. corners and centres)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Click Free to allow measurements from any point&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the start point.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the end point. The x, y, and total distances are displayed on the '''Properties''' panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue measuring distances and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-measure.png|600px|thumb|centre|Measuring distance between objects]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Grid==&lt;br /&gt;
The grid is useful to help accurately place and align objects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turn on/off the Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Toggle Grid. [[File:button-togglegrid.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click Toggle Grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of the grid.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Snap to Grid option is automatically enabled when the grid is turned on.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-grid.png|600px|thumb|centre|Grid on with 2 in width and height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turn on/off Snap to Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Snap to Grid [[File:button-snapgrid.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click Snap to Grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of Snap to Grid.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Change Grid Size and Offset===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Grid Size [[File:button-gridsize.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click Grid Size.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-faceeditor-gridsize.png|thumb|centre|Grid Size Dialog Box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Grid Size dialog box, change any of the following values:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Width'''â€”horizontal distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Height'''â€”vertical distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Offset Width'''â€”horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Offset Height'''â€”vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Grid Opacity'''â€”opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Save as Default Grid Size'''â€”use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check Save as Default Grid Size, the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor Window, even if you re-open the same face.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-gridoffset.png|600px|thumb|centre|Grid with 2 in width and height, 1 in Offset Width and Offset Height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Changing object properties==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-circle-silkscreen.png|thumb|Properties Pane for circle silkscreen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-text-silkscreen.png|thumb|Properties Pane for text silkscreen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fill===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to silkscreen and construction objects including circles, ellipses, rectangles, and paths.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Line Thickness===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to silkscreen and construction objects including circles, ellipses, rectangles, paths, and lines.''&lt;br /&gt;
''Also applies to lines of all object types.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to silkscreen objects including circles, ellipses, rectangles, paths, lines, and text.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a color from the '''Color''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
* Refer to [http://www.protocase.com/products/mcf_silkscreen.php Stocked Silkscreening Colors] for a list of available colours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Type===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to all objects.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* Object types include:&lt;br /&gt;
:Cutout&lt;br /&gt;
:Silkscreen&lt;br /&gt;
:Exclusion&lt;br /&gt;
:Construction&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Origin===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to all objects.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the location of the X and Y origins with respect to the absolute coordinate system.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.&lt;br /&gt;
* [image]&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Circles'''â€”centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Ellipses'''â€”centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Rectangles'''â€”corner closes to the absolute origin&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Text'''â€”bottom left corner&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Paths'''â€”start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Lines'''â€”start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Images'''â€”bottom left corner&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Size===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to all objects (options displayed depend on object selected).''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* All values use the default Display Units, unless otherwise specified.  See Preferences [add link] to change the default Display Units.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Circles'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Radius, Diameter'''â€”Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Ellipses'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusX'''â€”Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusY'''â€”Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).&lt;br /&gt;
'''Rectangles'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height'''â€”Width and Height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation'''â€”Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
'''Text'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation'''â€”Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font'''â€”Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, or Bookman.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Size'''â€”Change the font size within the available range of 7â€“99.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Style'''â€”Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Text'''â€”Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Path'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation'''â€”Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
'''Lines'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Length'''â€”Distance from origin to end point.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Images'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height'''â€”Width and height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation'''â€”Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding built-in cutouts=&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase DesignerÂ® also offers a variety of built-in cutouts that you can add to your enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To quickly place an existing item from the cutout library:&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]] and click a face to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, point to a category and then click an item.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-DB9menu.png|600px|thumb|centre]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the built-in cutout.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-db9.png|600px|thumb|centre]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|You can also open the Cutout Library window to perform more tasks such as creating or editing cutouts. On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library'''. See [[Cutout Library]] for further information.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding custom cutouts=&lt;br /&gt;
You can add custom cutouts from the Cutout Library using the same method as adding built-in cutouts. See [[#Adding_built-in_cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*The '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu contains all the items in the Cutout Library.&lt;br /&gt;
*See [[Cutout Library]] for details on creating custom cutouts in the Cutout Library window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding hardware=&lt;br /&gt;
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners to mount a PCB or handles. Protocase uses common PEMÂ® brand self-clinching fasteners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add self-clinching fasteners==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]] and click a face to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Toggle Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid and automatically turn on snap to grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#From the Cutout Library, select the type of Self Clinching Fastener and its options.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-pem.png|centre|Self-Clinching Fasteners Dialog Box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Place PEM''' and click the face to add the fasteners.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue adding fasteners and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-pem.png|600px|thumb|centre|Placing Self-Clinching Fasteners]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-main-pem.png|600px|thumb|centre|Self-Clinching Fasteners on bottom face (cover hidden)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add mounting hardware==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]] and click a face to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Toggle Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid and automatically turn on snap to grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, point to Hardware, then click a hardware item.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue adding mounting hardware and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-handles.png|600px|thumb|centre|Placing handles]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-main-ushape-handles.png|600px|thumb|centre|U-Shape enclosure with handles]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Manipulating objects=&lt;br /&gt;
==Select object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select multiple objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#** click the first object, press and hold the Shift key, then click other objects;&lt;br /&gt;
#**or click and drag a selection box over several objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-selection.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”selecting multiple objects by dragging a selection box]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Move object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To move a single object:{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move several objects:{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Align and distribute objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Select 2 or more objects. The Alignment and Distribute commands appear on the '''Properties''' panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, click an alignment or distribute command.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alignment'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Notes:'''''&lt;br /&gt;
*Objects align to first object selected&lt;br /&gt;
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-align.png|600px|thumb|centre|Objects with bottoms aligned and centers distributed evenly]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Distribute'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cut, Copy, and Paste objects==&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands to easily create multiple copies of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Select one or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Edit''' menu, select '''Cut''', '''Copy''', or '''Paste'''. A copy of the object(s) will appear next to the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the object(s) on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Undo and Redo actions==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Edit''' menu, select '''Undo''' or '''Redo'''.}}{{Note|You can Undo or Redo multiple times by repeatably selecting Undo or Redo.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Exporting a Face and Silkscreen Templates=&lt;br /&gt;
==Export Face==&lt;br /&gt;
You can export an image file (png format) of a face for use in presentations or to review the design.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Silkscreen''' menu, click '''Export Face to Bitmap for Presentation'''. A Save dialog box opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type a name for the image file and click '''Save'''.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Export/Import Silkscreen Template==&lt;br /&gt;
You can export an image file (png format) of a face to create a silkscreen template for editing in a 3rd party image program and importing back onto a face as a silkscreen image.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Silkscreen''' menu, click '''Export Silkscreen Template'''. A Save dialog box opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type a name for the image file and click '''Save'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the image file in an image editing program and design your silkscreen images.&lt;br /&gt;
#Save the image file (png format) in the image editing program.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Silkscreen''' menu, click '''Import Silkscreen Template'''. The image will be imported and placed on the face as a silkscreen image.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Face Editor Preferences=&lt;br /&gt;
You can change several parameters for controlling the Face Editor functionality.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:dialogbox-preferences.png|400px|thumb|centre|Preferences dialog box]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Edit''' Menu, click '''Preferences'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Preferences''' dialog box, change any of the following values:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Display Units'''â€”used for drawing/editing objects and measuring distances. On the '''Display Units''' menu, click '''INCHES''' or '''MM'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Grid Size X, Grid Size Y'''â€”the horizontal and vertical space between grid lines. Type a number or click the up/down arrows to change the value in 0.1 increments.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Precision Digits'''â€”the number of units displayed when drawing/editing objects and measuring distances. Type a number or click the up/down arrows to change the value in 0.1 increments.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Grid Opacity'''â€”opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Allow Free Editing'''â€”Enable or disable the ability to move or change the size of objects directly on the face. Clear the check box to prevent accidentally moving or changing the size of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Prompt for Whether to Reject Bad Moves'''â€”Displays a warning if you move an object outside a face boundary or overlapping an exclusion zone. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Reject Bad Moves'''â€”Prevents you from moving an object outside a face boundary or overlapping an exclusion zone. The object is automatically moved back to its original position.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Never Show Whatâ€™s New'''â€”Disables a dialog box at startup showing the new features of Protocase DesignerÂ®.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Show Whatâ€™s New for this version'''â€”Displays a dialog box at startup showing the new features for the current version of Protocase DesignerÂ®.}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=197</id>
		<title>Face Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=197"/>
				<updated>2012-07-12T17:42:19Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: /* Exporting a Face and Silkscreen Templates */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Face Editor Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The Face Editor allows you to customize the faces of your enclosure using standard editing tools for creating cutouts, silkscreens, exclusions zones, and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-labels.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Window]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;A. Standard Toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains common commands such as Cut Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo, as well as zoom and grid related commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;B. Drawing Toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains tools to draw shapes, add text, and add images to the face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;C. Viewport&lt;br /&gt;
:Working area that shows a 2D view of your enclosure face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;D. Status bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays the currently selected view, X- and Y coordinates of the pointer, side of face showing (outside or inside), and the name of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;E. Help pane&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays contextual help that changes based on the selected drawing tool.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;F. Properties pane&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays properties that can be changed for the selected object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the face=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Pan model==&lt;br /&gt;
To Pan the face, do one of the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 1'''&lt;br /&gt;
*In the viewport, click the wheel button and drag to pan the model to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 2'''&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard Toolbar''', click '''Pan'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the viewport, left-click and drag to pan the model to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 3'''&lt;br /&gt;
#Press and hold the '''Alt''' key.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the viewport, right-click and drag to pan the model to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zoom model==&lt;br /&gt;
To Zoom in or out, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 1'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Rotate the '''wheel button''' forward or backward.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 2'''&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard Toolbar''' (or on the '''View menu'''), click '''Zoom In''' or '''Zoom Out'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click within the viewport to incrementally zoom the model in or out.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 3'''&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard Toolbar''', click '''Zoom In'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag a diagonal selection within the viewport to zoom in to a desired area of the model.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The model moves toward the mouse pointer when zooming out and away from the mouse pointer when zooming in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reset view==&lt;br /&gt;
The Reset View command displays the face in the centre of the viewport at its original zoom level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 1'''&lt;br /&gt;
*On the '''Standard Toolbar''', click '''Reset View'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 2'''&lt;br /&gt;
*On the '''View''' menu, click '''Reset Zoom'''  to display the model in its original orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Drawing shapes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Select the drawing mode==&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a drawing mode changes the type of objects created using the drawing tools as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Cutouts===&lt;br /&gt;
Cutout drawing mode allows you to draw shapes on your enclosure for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, etc. You can also draw custom shapes to create cutout logos and images.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Silkscreen===&lt;br /&gt;
Silkscreen drawing mode allows you to draw shapes, images, and text on your enclosure for labelling or adding logos and product identifier graphics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Exclusion===&lt;br /&gt;
Exclusion drawing mode allows you to add shapes to your enclosure to mark areas where other objects cannot be added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Construction===&lt;br /&gt;
Construction drawing mode allows you to draw shapes on your enclosure for use as reference when creating cutouts, silkscreen or exclusion zones, as well as when placing hardware.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', click the '''Mode''' button [[File:button-mode.png||40px|bottom]]. A pop-out window appears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:button-drawmode.png|40px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click a draw type to set the default drawing mode. The drawing tool icons will change color to reflect the default drawing mode.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw circles==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-circle.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-circle-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-circle-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-circle-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Circle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the centre of the circle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing circles and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw ellipses==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-ellipse.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-ellipse-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-ellipse-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-ellipse-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Ellipse''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the centre of the ellipse.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing ellipses and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw rectangles==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-rectangle.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-rectangle-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-rectangle-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-rectangle-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the corner of the rectangle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing rectangles and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw squares==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-rectangle.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-rectangle-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-rectangle-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-rectangle-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Method 1=====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Standard''' toolbar click '''Toggle Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid and automatically turn on snap to grid.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the corner of the rectangle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box, using the grid to restrict the bounding box to a square.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing squares or rectangles and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
=====Method 2=====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the corner of the rectangle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box. You will convert the rectangle to a square in the next step.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Properties''' pane, change the Width and Height to be equal.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing squares or rectangles and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw custom paths==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-path.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-path-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-path-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-path-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the Path tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place points of the path.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create an arc using the '''Path''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Start creating a path as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; Click '''arc''' on the '''Properties''' panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; Press the '''A''' key.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the end of the arc&lt;br /&gt;
#Move the pointer to change the size of the arc and click to place the arc.&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; Continue placing arcs.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; Click '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or press the '''A''' key to continue placing lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw lines==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-line.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-line-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-line-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-line-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Line''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to start the line.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the end of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing new lines and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add text==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Silkscreen [[File:tool-text.png|40px|bottom]] drawing mode only.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Selecting the Image Tool will switch the drawing mode to Silkscreen, regardless of the current drawing mode.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Text''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face and begin typing to insert a text block.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click in a other locations to add additional text blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue adding text blocks and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add images==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Silkscreen [[File:tool-image.png|40px|bottom]] drawing mode only.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Selecting the Image Tool will switch the drawing mode to Silkscreen, regardless of the current drawing mode.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Image tool'''. An Open dialog box appears.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select an image file, such as a custom logo, and click '''Open'''.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Measure distances==&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Measure''' tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Measure''' tool. [[File:tool-measure.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*Click Snap to force measurements from key points on objects (e.g. corners and centres)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Click Free to allow measurements from any point&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the start point.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the end point. The x, y, and total distances are displayed on the '''Properties''' panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue measuring distances and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-measure.png|600px|thumb|centre|Measuring distance between objects]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Grid==&lt;br /&gt;
The grid is useful to help accurately place and align objects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turn on/off the Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Toggle Grid. [[File:button-togglegrid.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click Toggle Grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of the grid.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Snap to Grid option is automatically enabled when the grid is turned on.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-grid.png|600px|thumb|centre|Grid on with 2 in width and height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turn on/off Snap to Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Snap to Grid [[File:button-snapgrid.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click Snap to Grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of Snap to Grid.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Change Grid Size and Offset===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Grid Size [[File:button-gridsize.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click Grid Size.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-faceeditor-gridsize.png|thumb|centre|Grid Size Dialog Box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Grid Size dialog box, change any of the following values:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Width'''â€”horizontal distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Height'''â€”vertical distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Offset Width'''â€”horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Offset Height'''â€”vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Grid Opacity'''â€”opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Save as Default Grid Size'''â€”use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check Save as Default Grid Size, the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor Window, even if you re-open the same face.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-gridoffset.png|600px|thumb|centre|Grid with 2 in width and height, 1 in Offset Width and Offset Height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Changing object properties==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-circle-silkscreen.png|thumb|Properties Pane for circle silkscreen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-text-silkscreen.png|thumb|Properties Pane for text silkscreen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fill===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to silkscreen and construction objects including circles, ellipses, rectangles, and paths.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Line Thickness===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to silkscreen and construction objects including circles, ellipses, rectangles, paths, and lines.''&lt;br /&gt;
''Also applies to lines of all object types.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Type===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to all objects.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* Object types include:&lt;br /&gt;
:Cutout&lt;br /&gt;
:Silkscreen&lt;br /&gt;
:Exclusion&lt;br /&gt;
:Construction&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Origin===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to all objects.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the location of the X and Y origins with respect to the absolute coordinate system.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.&lt;br /&gt;
* [image]&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Circles'''â€”centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Ellipses'''â€”centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Rectangles'''â€”corner closes to the absolute origin&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Text'''â€”bottom left corner&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Paths'''â€”start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Lines'''â€”start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Images'''â€”bottom left corner&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Size===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to all objects (options displayed depend on object selected).''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* All values use the default Display Units, unless otherwise specified.  See Preferences [add link] to change the default Display Units.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Circles'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Radius, Diameter'''â€”Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Ellipses'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusX'''â€”Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusY'''â€”Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).&lt;br /&gt;
'''Rectangles'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height'''â€”Width and Height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation'''â€”Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
'''Text'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation'''â€”Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font'''â€”Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, or Bookman.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Size'''â€”Change the font size within the available range of 7â€“99.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Style'''â€”Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Text'''â€”Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Path'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation'''â€”Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
'''Lines'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Length'''â€”Distance from origin to end point.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Images'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height'''â€”Width and height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation'''â€”Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding built-in cutouts=&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase DesignerÂ® also offers a variety of built-in cutouts that you can add to your enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To quickly place an existing item from the cutout library:&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]] and click a face to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, point to a category and then click an item.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-DB9menu.png|600px|thumb|centre]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the built-in cutout.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-db9.png|600px|thumb|centre]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|You can also open the Cutout Library window to perform more tasks such as creating or editing cutouts. On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library'''. See [[Cutout Library]] for further information.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding custom cutouts=&lt;br /&gt;
You can add custom cutouts from the Cutout Library using the same method as adding built-in cutouts. See [[#Adding_built-in_cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*The '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu contains all the items in the Cutout Library.&lt;br /&gt;
*See [[Cutout Library]] for details on creating custom cutouts in the Cutout Library window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding hardware=&lt;br /&gt;
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners to mount a PCB or handles. Protocase uses common PEMÂ® brand self-clinching fasteners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add self-clinching fasteners==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]] and click a face to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Toggle Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid and automatically turn on snap to grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#From the Cutout Library, select the type of Self Clinching Fastener and its options.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-pem.png|centre|Self-Clinching Fasteners Dialog Box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Place PEM''' and click the face to add the fasteners.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue adding fasteners and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-pem.png|600px|thumb|centre|Placing Self-Clinching Fasteners]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-main-pem.png|600px|thumb|centre|Self-Clinching Fasteners on bottom face (cover hidden)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add mounting hardware==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]] and click a face to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Toggle Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid and automatically turn on snap to grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, point to Hardware, then click a hardware item.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue adding mounting hardware and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-handles.png|600px|thumb|centre|Placing handles]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-main-ushape-handles.png|600px|thumb|centre|U-Shape enclosure with handles]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Manipulating objects=&lt;br /&gt;
==Select object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select multiple objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#** click the first object, press and hold the Shift key, then click other objects;&lt;br /&gt;
#**or click and drag a selection box over several objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-selection.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”selecting multiple objects by dragging a selection box]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Move object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To move a single object:{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move several objects:{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Align and distribute objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Select 2 or more objects. The Alignment and Distribute commands appear on the '''Properties''' panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, click an alignment or distribute command.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alignment'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Notes:'''''&lt;br /&gt;
*Objects align to first object selected&lt;br /&gt;
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-align.png|600px|thumb|centre|Objects with bottoms aligned and centers distributed evenly]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Distribute'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cut, Copy, and Paste objects==&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands to easily create multiple copies of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Select one or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Edit''' menu, select '''Cut''', '''Copy''', or '''Paste'''. A copy of the object(s) will appear next to the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the object(s) on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Undo and Redo actions==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Edit''' menu, select '''Undo''' or '''Redo'''.}}{{Note|You can Undo or Redo multiple times by repeatably selecting Undo or Redo.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Exporting a Face and Silkscreen Templates=&lt;br /&gt;
==Export Face==&lt;br /&gt;
You can export an image file (png format) of a face for use in presentations or to review the design.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Silkscreen''' menu, click '''Export Face to Bitmap for Presentation'''. A Save dialog box opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type a name for the image file and click '''Save'''.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Export/Import Silkscreen Template==&lt;br /&gt;
You can export an image file (png format) of a face to create a silkscreen template for editing in a 3rd party image program and importing back onto a face as a silkscreen image.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Silkscreen''' menu, click '''Export Silkscreen Template'''. A Save dialog box opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type a name for the image file and click '''Save'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the image file in an image editing program and design your silkscreen images.&lt;br /&gt;
#Save the image file (png format) in the image editing program.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Silkscreen''' menu, click '''Import Silkscreen Template'''. The image will be imported and placed on the face as a silkscreen image.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Face Editor Preferences=&lt;br /&gt;
You can change several parameters for controlling the Face Editor functionality.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:dialogbox-preferences.png|400px|thumb|centre|Preferences dialog box]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Edit''' Menu, click '''Preferences'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Preferences''' dialog box, change any of the following values:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Display Units'''â€”used for drawing/editing objects and measuring distances. On the '''Display Units''' menu, click '''INCHES''' or '''MM'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Grid Size X, Grid Size Y'''â€”the horizontal and vertical space between grid lines. Type a number or click the up/down arrows to change the value in 0.1 increments.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Precision Digits'''â€”the number of units displayed when drawing/editing objects and measuring distances. Type a number or click the up/down arrows to change the value in 0.1 increments.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Grid Opacity'''â€”opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Allow Free Editing'''â€”Enable or disable the ability to move or change the size of objects directly on the face. Clear the check box to prevent accidentally moving or changing the size of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Prompt for Whether to Reject Bad Moves'''â€”Displays a warning if you move an object outside a face boundary or overlapping an exclusion zone. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Reject Bad Moves'''â€”Prevents you from moving an object outside a face boundary or overlapping an exclusion zone. The object is automatically moved back to its original position.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Never Show Whatâ€™s New'''â€”Disables a dialog box at startup showing the new features of Protocase DesignerÂ®.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Show Whatâ€™s New for this version'''â€”Displays a dialog box at startup showing the new features for the current version of Protocase DesignerÂ®.}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=196</id>
		<title>Face Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=196"/>
				<updated>2012-07-12T17:40:25Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Face Editor Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The Face Editor allows you to customize the faces of your enclosure using standard editing tools for creating cutouts, silkscreens, exclusions zones, and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-labels.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Window]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;A. Standard Toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains common commands such as Cut Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo, as well as zoom and grid related commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;B. Drawing Toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains tools to draw shapes, add text, and add images to the face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;C. Viewport&lt;br /&gt;
:Working area that shows a 2D view of your enclosure face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;D. Status bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays the currently selected view, X- and Y coordinates of the pointer, side of face showing (outside or inside), and the name of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;E. Help pane&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays contextual help that changes based on the selected drawing tool.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;F. Properties pane&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays properties that can be changed for the selected object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the face=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Pan model==&lt;br /&gt;
To Pan the face, do one of the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 1'''&lt;br /&gt;
*In the viewport, click the wheel button and drag to pan the model to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 2'''&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard Toolbar''', click '''Pan'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the viewport, left-click and drag to pan the model to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 3'''&lt;br /&gt;
#Press and hold the '''Alt''' key.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the viewport, right-click and drag to pan the model to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zoom model==&lt;br /&gt;
To Zoom in or out, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 1'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Rotate the '''wheel button''' forward or backward.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 2'''&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard Toolbar''' (or on the '''View menu'''), click '''Zoom In''' or '''Zoom Out'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click within the viewport to incrementally zoom the model in or out.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 3'''&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard Toolbar''', click '''Zoom In'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag a diagonal selection within the viewport to zoom in to a desired area of the model.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The model moves toward the mouse pointer when zooming out and away from the mouse pointer when zooming in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reset view==&lt;br /&gt;
The Reset View command displays the face in the centre of the viewport at its original zoom level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 1'''&lt;br /&gt;
*On the '''Standard Toolbar''', click '''Reset View'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Method 2'''&lt;br /&gt;
*On the '''View''' menu, click '''Reset Zoom'''  to display the model in its original orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Drawing shapes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Select the drawing mode==&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a drawing mode changes the type of objects created using the drawing tools as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Cutouts===&lt;br /&gt;
Cutout drawing mode allows you to draw shapes on your enclosure for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, etc. You can also draw custom shapes to create cutout logos and images.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Silkscreen===&lt;br /&gt;
Silkscreen drawing mode allows you to draw shapes, images, and text on your enclosure for labelling or adding logos and product identifier graphics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Exclusion===&lt;br /&gt;
Exclusion drawing mode allows you to add shapes to your enclosure to mark areas where other objects cannot be added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Construction===&lt;br /&gt;
Construction drawing mode allows you to draw shapes on your enclosure for use as reference when creating cutouts, silkscreen or exclusion zones, as well as when placing hardware.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', click the '''Mode''' button [[File:button-mode.png||40px|bottom]]. A pop-out window appears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:button-drawmode.png|40px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click a draw type to set the default drawing mode. The drawing tool icons will change color to reflect the default drawing mode.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw circles==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-circle.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-circle-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-circle-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-circle-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Circle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the centre of the circle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing circles and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw ellipses==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-ellipse.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-ellipse-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-ellipse-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-ellipse-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Ellipse''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the centre of the ellipse.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing ellipses and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw rectangles==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-rectangle.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-rectangle-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-rectangle-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-rectangle-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the corner of the rectangle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing rectangles and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw squares==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-rectangle.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-rectangle-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-rectangle-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-rectangle-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Method 1=====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Standard''' toolbar click '''Toggle Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid and automatically turn on snap to grid.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the corner of the rectangle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box, using the grid to restrict the bounding box to a square.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing squares or rectangles and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
=====Method 2=====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to place the corner of the rectangle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the corner of the bounding box. You will convert the rectangle to a square in the next step.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Properties''' pane, change the Width and Height to be equal.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing squares or rectangles and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw custom paths==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-path.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-path-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-path-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-path-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the Path tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place points of the path.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create an arc using the '''Path''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Start creating a path as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; Click '''arc''' on the '''Properties''' panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; Press the '''A''' key.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the end of the arc&lt;br /&gt;
#Move the pointer to change the size of the arc and click to place the arc.&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; Continue placing arcs.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8226; Click '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or press the '''A''' key to continue placing lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Draw lines==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Cutout [[File:tool-line.png|40px|bottom]], Silkscreen [[File:tool-line-silkscreen.png|40px|bottom]], Exclusion [[File:tool-line-exclusion.png|40px|bottom]] and Construction [[File:tool-line-construction.png|40px|bottom]] drawing modes.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Line''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click to start the line.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag to set the end of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue drawing new lines and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add text==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Silkscreen [[File:tool-text.png|40px|bottom]] drawing mode only.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Selecting the Image Tool will switch the drawing mode to Silkscreen, regardless of the current drawing mode.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Text''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face and begin typing to insert a text block.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click in a other locations to add additional text blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue adding text blocks and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add images==&lt;br /&gt;
''Available in Silkscreen [[File:tool-image.png|40px|bottom]] drawing mode only.''&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Selecting the Image Tool will switch the drawing mode to Silkscreen, regardless of the current drawing mode.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing Toolbar''', select the '''Image tool'''. An Open dialog box appears.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select an image file, such as a custom logo, and click '''Open'''.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Measure distances==&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Measure''' tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Measure''' tool. [[File:tool-measure.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*Click Snap to force measurements from key points on objects (e.g. corners and centres)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Click Free to allow measurements from any point&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the start point.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the end point. The x, y, and total distances are displayed on the '''Properties''' panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue measuring distances and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-measure.png|600px|thumb|centre|Measuring distance between objects]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Grid==&lt;br /&gt;
The grid is useful to help accurately place and align objects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turn on/off the Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Toggle Grid. [[File:button-togglegrid.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click Toggle Grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of the grid.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Snap to Grid option is automatically enabled when the grid is turned on.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-grid.png|600px|thumb|centre|Grid on with 2 in width and height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turn on/off Snap to Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Snap to Grid [[File:button-snapgrid.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click Snap to Grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of Snap to Grid.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Change Grid Size and Offset===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Grid Size [[File:button-gridsize.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click Grid Size.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-faceeditor-gridsize.png|thumb|centre|Grid Size Dialog Box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Grid Size dialog box, change any of the following values:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Width'''â€”horizontal distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Height'''â€”vertical distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Offset Width'''â€”horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Offset Height'''â€”vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Grid Opacity'''â€”opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Save as Default Grid Size'''â€”use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check Save as Default Grid Size, the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor Window, even if you re-open the same face.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-gridoffset.png|600px|thumb|centre|Grid with 2 in width and height, 1 in Offset Width and Offset Height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Changing object properties==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-circle-silkscreen.png|thumb|Properties Pane for circle silkscreen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-text-silkscreen.png|thumb|Properties Pane for text silkscreen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fill===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to silkscreen and construction objects including circles, ellipses, rectangles, and paths.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Line Thickness===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to silkscreen and construction objects including circles, ellipses, rectangles, paths, and lines.''&lt;br /&gt;
''Also applies to lines of all object types.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Type===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to all objects.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* Object types include:&lt;br /&gt;
:Cutout&lt;br /&gt;
:Silkscreen&lt;br /&gt;
:Exclusion&lt;br /&gt;
:Construction&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Origin===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to all objects.''&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the location of the X and Y origins with respect to the absolute coordinate system.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.&lt;br /&gt;
* [image]&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Circles'''â€”centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Ellipses'''â€”centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Rectangles'''â€”corner closes to the absolute origin&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Text'''â€”bottom left corner&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Paths'''â€”start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Lines'''â€”start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Images'''â€”bottom left corner&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Size===&lt;br /&gt;
''Applies to all objects (options displayed depend on object selected).''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* All values use the default Display Units, unless otherwise specified.  See Preferences [add link] to change the default Display Units.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Circles'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Radius, Diameter'''â€”Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Ellipses'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusX'''â€”Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusY'''â€”Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).&lt;br /&gt;
'''Rectangles'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height'''â€”Width and Height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation'''â€”Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
'''Text'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation'''â€”Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font'''â€”Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, or Bookman.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Size'''â€”Change the font size within the available range of 7â€“99.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Style'''â€”Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Text'''â€”Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Path'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation'''â€”Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
'''Lines'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Length'''â€”Distance from origin to end point.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Images'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height'''â€”Width and height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation'''â€”Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding built-in cutouts=&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase DesignerÂ® also offers a variety of built-in cutouts that you can add to your enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To quickly place an existing item from the cutout library:&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]] and click a face to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, point to a category and then click an item.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-DB9menu.png|600px|thumb|centre]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the built-in cutout.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-db9.png|600px|thumb|centre]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|You can also open the Cutout Library window to perform more tasks such as creating or editing cutouts. On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library'''. See [[Cutout Library]] for further information.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding custom cutouts=&lt;br /&gt;
You can add custom cutouts from the Cutout Library using the same method as adding built-in cutouts. See [[#Adding_built-in_cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*The '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu contains all the items in the Cutout Library.&lt;br /&gt;
*See [[Cutout Library]] for details on creating custom cutouts in the Cutout Library window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding hardware=&lt;br /&gt;
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners to mount a PCB or handles. Protocase uses common PEMÂ® brand self-clinching fasteners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add self-clinching fasteners==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]] and click a face to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Toggle Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid and automatically turn on snap to grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#From the Cutout Library, select the type of Self Clinching Fastener and its options.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:dialogbox-pem.png|centre|Self-Clinching Fasteners Dialog Box]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Place PEM''' and click the face to add the fasteners.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue adding fasteners and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-pem.png|600px|thumb|centre|Placing Self-Clinching Fasteners]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-main-pem.png|600px|thumb|centre|Self-Clinching Fasteners on bottom face (cover hidden)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add mounting hardware==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Edit Face''' [[File:button-editface.png|40px|bottom]] and click a face to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Standard''' toolbar, click '''Toggle Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid and automatically turn on snap to grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, point to Hardware, then click a hardware item.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue adding mounting hardware and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-handles.png|600px|thumb|centre|Placing handles]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-main-ushape-handles.png|600px|thumb|centre|U-Shape enclosure with handles]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Manipulating objects=&lt;br /&gt;
==Select object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select multiple objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#** click the first object, press and hold the Shift key, then click other objects;&lt;br /&gt;
#**or click and drag a selection box over several objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-selection.png|600px|thumb|center|Face Editor Windowâ€”selecting multiple objects by dragging a selection box]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Move object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To move a single object:{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move several objects:{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Align and distribute objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Select 2 or more objects. The Alignment and Distribute commands appear on the '''Properties''' panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Properties''' panel, click an alignment or distribute command.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alignment'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Notes:'''''&lt;br /&gt;
*Objects align to first object selected&lt;br /&gt;
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-align.png|600px|thumb|centre|Objects with bottoms aligned and centers distributed evenly]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Distribute'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cut, Copy, and Paste objects==&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands to easily create multiple copies of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#Select one or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Edit''' menu, select '''Cut''', '''Copy''', or '''Paste'''. A copy of the object(s) will appear next to the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the object(s) on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and select the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] when you are done.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Undo and Redo actions==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Edit''' menu, select '''Undo''' or '''Redo'''.}}{{Note|You can Undo or Redo multiple times by repeatably selecting Undo or Redo.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Exporting a Face and Silkscreen Templates=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Face Editor Preferences=&lt;br /&gt;
You can change several parameters for controlling the Face Editor functionality.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Procedure|&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:dialogbox-preferences.png|400px|thumb|centre|Preferences dialog box]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Edit''' Menu, click '''Preferences'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Preferences''' dialog box, change any of the following values:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Display Units'''â€”used for drawing/editing objects and measuring distances. On the '''Display Units''' menu, click '''INCHES''' or '''MM'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Grid Size X, Grid Size Y'''â€”the horizontal and vertical space between grid lines. Type a number or click the up/down arrows to change the value in 0.1 increments.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Precision Digits'''â€”the number of units displayed when drawing/editing objects and measuring distances. Type a number or click the up/down arrows to change the value in 0.1 increments.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Grid Opacity'''â€”opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Allow Free Editing'''â€”Enable or disable the ability to move or change the size of objects directly on the face. Clear the check box to prevent accidentally moving or changing the size of objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Prompt for Whether to Reject Bad Moves'''â€”Displays a warning if you move an object outside a face boundary or overlapping an exclusion zone. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Reject Bad Moves'''â€”Prevents you from moving an object outside a face boundary or overlapping an exclusion zone. The object is automatically moved back to its original position.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Never Show Whatâ€™s New'''â€”Disables a dialog box at startup showing the new features of Protocase DesignerÂ®.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Show Whatâ€™s New for this version'''â€”Displays a dialog box at startup showing the new features for the current version of Protocase DesignerÂ®.}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness&amp;diff=195</id>
		<title>Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness&amp;diff=195"/>
				<updated>2012-07-12T14:55:13Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: Created page with &amp;quot;Self-Clinching fasteners are threaded nuts, studs, or standoffs that are mechanically pressed into sheet metal to provide solid fastening points. Nuts can be used to accept bo...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Self-Clinching fasteners are threaded nuts, studs, or standoffs that are mechanically pressed into sheet metal to provide solid fastening points. Nuts can be used to accept bolts, standoffs can be inserted for mounting circuit boards and studs can be used for mounting connectors.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram-selfclinchingfasteners.png|500px|thumb|center|Self-Clinching Fasteners]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Self-clinching standoffs and studs extend through the sheet metal from the outside face. Therefore, when selecting the height of self-clinching fasteners, you must consider the material thickness to ensure there is sufficient clearance between your component and the enclosure. &lt;br /&gt;
*To calculate the actual clearance between a circuit board and the enclosure, you must subtract the sheet metal thickness from the height of the self-clinching fastener.&lt;br /&gt;
*For example, a 0.375â€ (9.53mm) standoff, mounted in a 14 gauge (0.075â€) enclosure wall, will provide only 0.300â€ (7.62mm) clearance to a component, and less if the metal is thicker.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram-standoffheight.png|500px|thumb|center|Standoff height calculation based on minimum PCB clearance]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase offers a wide variety of [http://www.protocase.com/products/mcf_self_clinching_fasteners.php self-clinching fasteners] for use in your enclosure designs.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Tutorials&amp;diff=194</id>
		<title>Tutorials</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Tutorials&amp;diff=194"/>
				<updated>2012-07-12T14:47:38Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: /* Creating an enclosure to mount a PCB */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;====[[Creating an enclosure to mount a PCB]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial will guide you through the process of creating a custom rackmount enclosure to mount a mini-ITX PCB using self-clinching fasteners, and create cutouts for the PCB, power supply, and fan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness]]====&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial will explain how to select the height of self-clinching fasteners, such as standoffs and studs, for mounting components to your enclosures.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Diagram-standoffheight.png&amp;diff=193</id>
		<title>File:Diagram-standoffheight.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Diagram-standoffheight.png&amp;diff=193"/>
				<updated>2012-07-12T14:45:46Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Diagram-selfclinchingfasteners.png&amp;diff=192</id>
		<title>File:Diagram-selfclinchingfasteners.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Diagram-selfclinchingfasteners.png&amp;diff=192"/>
				<updated>2012-07-12T14:45:31Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tchen: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tchen</name></author>	</entry>

	</feed>